JP2020192458A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine includes display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and game state switching means for switching the game state to a second game state when the number of variations in a first game state reaches a specific number of times. The game machine can execute a first performance in which reach schedule information related to the remaining number of variations until the specified number is reached is displayed when the number of variations after power supply to the game machine reaches a first predetermined number, in the first game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

JP-A-2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a gaming state switching means for switching the gaming state to the second gaming state when the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches a specific number of times.
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the gaming machine is turned on reaches the first predetermined number, the arrival schedule information which is the information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached is displayed. The first production to be performed can be performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the gaming machine is turned on becomes the second predetermined number of times equal to or less than the first predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the specific number is greater than the threshold value. When the number is small, a second effect in which suggestive information suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations is less than the threshold value is displayed can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 2
In the second effect, when the suggestion information is displayed, the arrival schedule information is also displayed, and when the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine reaches the first predetermined number of times. The arrival schedule information is continuously displayed until
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 3
When the suggestion information is displayed in the second effect, after the second effect, the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine is turned on becomes the third predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times. Occasionally, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the display of the suggestion information disappears while the display of the arrival schedule information is continued.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to the application example 3 or the application example 4.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means.
The display of the suggestion information means that the suggestion image appears.
In the second effect, the suggestion image is displayed on the first display means, then moved to the second display means, and the suggestion image is displayed on the second display means by the movement. The arrival schedule information is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 2 to 5.
In the second effect, when the number of fluctuations after the game machine is turned on reaches the second predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached is smaller than the threshold value. However, the suggestion information may not be displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display effect of the sub-display screen 64. It is a figure for demonstrating the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special character appearance effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special character appearance effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special character appearance effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit notification effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit notification effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit notification effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the sound reach production. It is a figure for demonstrating the silent reach effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the silent reach effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the vibe effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the vibe effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the vibe effect C. It is explanatory drawing of the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variation. It is explanatory drawing of the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variation. It is explanatory drawing of the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the promotion effect A after the symbol alignment. It is a figure for demonstrating the promotion effect B after the symbol alignment. It is a figure for demonstrating the promotion effect C after the symbol alignment. It is a figure for demonstrating the reserved symbol effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the reserved symbol effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the reserved symbol effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol variation stop effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol variation stop effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol variation stop effect C.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the game machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction as seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a gaming ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, the effect button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and the like. It is equipped with a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. On the right side and the left side of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also referred to as a frame movable accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can move in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface approaches or moves away from the handle 60. Normally, the frame movable body 69 is stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and moves (advances) so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the handle 60. ), And can stand still at the position where it touches the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when in the advanced position.

The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right according to the effect and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of the liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are arranged at a paired position via the game board 2. The upper sub display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to produce light emission during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonal line-shaped light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the right sub display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal line-shaped light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the left sub display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , Ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, big winning opening open It includes a starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has an area and a reserved digested image display area (the reserved display area) on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the change icon 9C, and the change icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". In the left symbol display area, the left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variable display mode of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or a mode of other modes. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The hold image display area displays a first hold display area for displaying the hold image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure hold described later, and a hold image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure hold described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first special symbol is reserved. 2 It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front (front surface) of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a to display the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advance position in front of. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp portion 12 includes an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 is required when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. This is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. Is equipped with. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to include the large winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges a game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first winning opening 30, and the second winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: on, ●: off) from the left, , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the rightmost LED is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the normal symbol hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the first Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large winning opening open start opening 17, and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening open start opening 17. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to the program for performing display control, the ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. (including production symbols) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, or acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and follows the operation pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the effect button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5 (B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. The fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passage command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer or the like is provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the status of the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by the ram clear of the game machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flag. Further, as the initial state of the counter, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub RAM 94, except for the evening-over effect counter, the information is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the state of the above command, the counter other than the evening effect counter, and the pre-judgment information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening-over effect counter is reset by turning the power of the game machine 1 off and on, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by the ram clear of the game machine 1. When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be judged as "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6-127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). It is a table referenced to do. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV planned passage jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", it is released. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second major winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. At that time, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..
Open the door.

4. Explanation of jackpot, etc. In game machine 1, there are "big hit" and "loss" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. There is. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are such that the time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the jackpot game is completed. It has become. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. In addition, after the time-saving game is completed, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) in "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot". However, apparently, it becomes a high accuracy and low base state in the normal state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is changed. It is a latent state (latent probability variation state) that the probability is high even though it is a high probability low base state, and it is difficult for the player to discriminate this latent probability variation state. That is, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" big hit Low probability after the game (low accuracy) High base state) and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" jackpot High accuracy time saving state after the game (high accuracy high base state), and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" time saving end The later low-accuracy low-base state and the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the time reduction of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" are performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for V-passing jackpots and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for V-non-passing jackpots. 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of the normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the game is passed to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy high-base state are "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", and " 16R (actually 13R) V passing jackpot ". For "16RV passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot", in the high accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. Ends with. In the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", in the high-accuracy high-base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), and the high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability change). It ends when it becomes a state) or when the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a low-accuracy high-base state is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In this jackpot, in the low probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. It ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss advance determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "1" or "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial value of the other flags is "0" or "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value is used as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. Special Figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from random value and fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , And the variation pattern "P68" selected when the number of reserved balls is "3-4" is selected. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ") To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is judged as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is judged as "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the hit determination (step S505) described above is "missing", the fluctuation display is stopped. (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot judgment table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the jackpot type is determined, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is "P1". "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is "P15" to "P15" in the special figure 1). The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). (Parts of "P46") are referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, "100" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability change state, probability change counter value, time reduction state, time reduction counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). .. Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" as the specified rotation speed is set in the ceiling counter. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by one (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of revolutions has elapsed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of times of time saving (number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not the time to open the big winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot", the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first winning ball has been won in the first large winning opening 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short open" or "long open". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened in the case of "long opening" when the second ball is won. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "100" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "100". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "100" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified rotation speed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the big hit game, when the probability change flag is OFF, the b time is shortened (play time) when the probability change flag is turned off 500 times. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, and 12th round. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute the specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it is not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is output to the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag) , Ceiling counter, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, the values of the time saving effect counter, the probability variation effect counter, and the ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated based on the information included in the game state designation command. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time reduction (the number of games) is set in the time reduction effect counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during the probability change is set in the probability variation effect counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in the ceiling effect counter. As a result, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth reserved in FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 Predetermined information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. There are multiple types of core production patterns that produce a loss without reach. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the count effect pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process includes the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of games) at the time of probability change, the number of remaining fluctuations during a short time, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations and the like on the display screen 7a. At the time of probability change, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the display screen 7a to display the number of remaining probability changes based on the value of the probability change effect counter. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number based on the value of the time reduction effect counter at the time of time reduction.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects from the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the evening effect counter records the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from the time when the power is turned on by incrementing the evening effect counter each time a variation effect end command is received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) or less when the value of the effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 or less, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is larger than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the game machine 1 has taken over the number of games of the previous day and the ram clear has not been performed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3 = 50). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may erase the display or chance image representing the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the effect counter is TH4 (for example, TH4 = 100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter again when the value of the effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5 = 200). As described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter based on the value of the evening effect counter, or based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. May be good. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (for example, TH6 = 100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (for example, TH7 = 70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8 = 50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined with reference to the effect control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5016 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the notice fade effect for fading the notice image.

9. Movement of the movable body and display effect of the sub display screen 64 Using FIGS. 46 to 50, the movement of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable accessory) The operation of 69) and the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a drive control for operating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. To do. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a moving mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7, and the lower end of which is located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper end and the lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front (front) of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first aspect). At the retracted position, only a part of the first movable accessory 14 may be stored so that the rest can be visually recognized, or the entire first movable accessory 14 may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can be stationary at an arbitrary advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second aspect). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed at least in a part thereof, or may have a transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 48 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped in front of (front) of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) upward from the advanced position of FIG. 48, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each of them is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The two members are made of flexible members, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach or move away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at the retracted position (home position) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60 (first aspect). .. As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 each move (advance) from the retracted position toward the handle 60, that is, move so as to approach each other, and move to the handle 60, respectively. It can stand still at the touching position (second aspect). The frame movable accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when in the advanced position. The frame movable accessory 69 can move the two members in a direction away from each other so as to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U can each display images independently. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. This ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect is executed after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, during a variation effect of the decorative symbol in a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Ceiling arrival schedule suggestion production A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect displays information (arrival schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of fluctuations (the number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 500 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). .. Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling. In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), three hold icons 9A and a change icon (the hold icon) are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a. ) 9C is displayed.

Here, the number of fluctuations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on is 10 times, and the value YC of the evening-over effect counter is 10 (YC = 10). The number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190 (TC = 190). That is, the power of the game machine 1 was turned off when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter was 200 on the previous day, and after the power was turned on the next day, the special figure was changed 10 times. In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 10, the third threshold value TH3 = 50, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 100 are set (stored) as threshold values for the evening counter. Further, a second threshold value TH2 = 200 is set (stored) as a threshold value for the ceiling effect counter. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), in the sub-control board 90, when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC = TH1 = 10), the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes the second threshold value TH2. It is determined whether or not it is smaller than (= 200). Then, when TC is smaller than TH2 (TC <TH2), the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 51 (B). On the other hand, when TC is TH2 or more (TC ≧ TH2), the suggestion information SJ is not displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 52 (B) described later). The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). When this suggestion information SJ is displayed, the player indicates that the game machine 1 has not been ram-cleared from the previous day to today, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached continues from the previous day. You can know.

The suggestion information SJ of the present embodiment is a star-shaped graphic image, and is displayed on the back side of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C so as to overlap with each other. The display of the suggestion information SJ means that if it is possible to suggest to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2, a new image is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is not limited to the mode to be displayed, that is, the mode in which the suggestive image appears. For example, the suggestion information SJ may be represented (suggested) by changing a part of the display screen 7a to a specific color, or may be represented by emitting light. Further, it may be expressed by changing the color, form, position, etc. of the image that has already been displayed. The sub-control board 90 may not display the suggestion information SJ with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) even when YC = TH1 and TC <TH2. For example, the sub-control board 90 may acquire a random number when YC = TH1 and decide whether to execute or not execute the display effect of the suggestion information SJ according to the random number value.

As shown in FIG. 51 (C), after the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the suggestion information SJ moves to the right on the display screen 7a where the right sub display screen 64R is located. After that, the suggestion information SJ is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R, and further moves to the right, so that the whole is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 51 (D). Is displayed. As the entire suggestion information SJ is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R, the arrival schedule information CD is displayed. Here, the timing at which the entire suggestion information SJ is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the timing at which the arrival schedule information CD is displayed are simultaneous, but these timings may be different. The arrival schedule information CD is information related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time reduction (play time) is reached, and notifies the player of the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached. Here, the arrival schedule information CD is an image including a numerical value "190" representing the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached. The arrival schedule information CD is not necessarily limited to a numerical value representing the remaining number of fluctuations as long as it is related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached. For example, the ratio of the remaining number of fluctuations to the first set number of times (for example, 500) set after the big hit game may be expressed in%, or the ratio may be expressed by a meter. In addition, the remaining number of fluctuations may be qualitatively expressed as "still" or "a little more" or a color change. In FIG. 51 (A), when YC = TH1 and TC ≧ TH2 and the suggestion information SJ is not displayed on the display screen 7a, the arrival schedule information CD is not displayed at this point.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (E) and 51 (F), after that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and after the pending digestion, the suggestion information is provided while the next variation of the special figure 1 is started. The display of the SJ and the arrival schedule information CD is maintained on the right sub display screen 64R. When the next fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started, the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD is decremented by 1. Here, the numerical value is changed from "190" to "189".

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 51 (F), as shown in FIG. 51 (G), the sub control board 90 is set when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC). = TH3 = 50), it is determined whether or not the arrival schedule information CD is displayed. Then, when the arrival schedule information CD is not displayed, it is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. If it has already been displayed, the display of the arrival schedule information CD is continued. Here, the arrival schedule information CD has already been displayed, and the counter value is "150" at this point.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 51 (G), as shown in FIG. 51 (H), the sub-control board 90 is set when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC). = TH4 = 100), it is determined whether or not the suggestion information SJ is displayed. Then, when the suggestion information SJ is displayed, the display is turned off. At this time, the display of the arrival schedule information CD is maintained. At this point, the counter value is "100". If the suggestion information SJ is not displayed, nothing is done by this process.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 51 (H), as shown in FIG. 51 (I), when the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD becomes “0”, the main control board 80 changes the gaming state. Switch from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 lottery is still performed at the time of entry, the special figure 1 lottery in a time-saving state is executed. A right-handed display is displayed during this fluctuation, prompting the player to obtain the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 51 (J), on the right sub display screen 64R, the arrival schedule information CD is enlarged, and an enlarged effect of being displayed straddling the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a is performed. By this effect, the player can easily recognize that the number of fluctuations has reached the ceiling and the time-saving game of the play time has started. This continuation is the same as in FIGS. 52 (H) to 52 (J) described later.

[Ceiling arrival schedule suggestion production B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B is an effect executed when the counter value of the ceiling effect counter value TC is larger than that of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A with respect to the value YC of the evening counter. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect displays information (arrival schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of fluctuations (the number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 500 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). .. Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling. FIG. 52 (A) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B has the same effect content as FIG. 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. That is, three hold icons 9A and the change icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the number of fluctuations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on is 10 times, and the value YC of the evening-over effect counter is 10 (YC = 10). Further, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 290 times (190 times in the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A), and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 290 (TC = 290). That is, the power of the game machine 1 was turned off when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter was 300 on the previous day, and after the power was turned on on the next day, the special figure was changed 10 times. In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 10, the third threshold value TH3 = 50, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 100 are set (stored) as threshold values for the evening counter. Further, a second threshold value TH2 = 200 is set (stored) as a threshold value for the ceiling effect counter. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the sub-control board 90, when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC = TH1 = 10), the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes the second threshold value TH2. It is determined whether or not it is smaller than (= 200). Then, when TC is smaller than TH2 (TC <TH2), the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 51 (B) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. On the other hand, here, since TC is TH2 or more (TC = 290 ≧ TH2), as shown in FIG. 52B, the fluctuation ends without displaying the suggestion information SJ on the display screen 7a. The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). Here, since the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 290, it is not displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the game machine 1 may have been ram-cleared from the previous day to today.

After repeating the variation of Special FIG. 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 52 (B), as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the sub control board 90 is set when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC). = TH3 = 50), it is determined whether or not the arrival schedule information CD is displayed. When the arrival schedule information CD is not displayed, the arrival schedule information CD is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 52 (D). Here, since the arrival schedule information CD was not displayed, the arrival schedule information CD whose counter value is "250" is newly displayed. If the arrival schedule information CD is already displayed, the arrival schedule information CD is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (E) and 52 (F), after that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and after the hold digestion, the arrival is scheduled to be reached while the next variation of the special figure 1 is started. The display of the information CD is maintained on the right sub display screen 64R. When the next fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started, the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD is decremented by 1. Here, the numerical value is changed from "250" to "249". The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the suggestion information SJ (see FIG. 51 (G)) is displayed when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC = TH4 = 100). .. Then, when the suggestion information SJ is displayed, the display is turned off. Here, since the suggestion information SJ is not displayed, nothing is particularly performed by this process.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 52 (F), as shown in FIG. 52 (G), when the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD becomes “0”, the main control board 80 changes the gaming state. Switch from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 lottery is still performed at the time of entry, the special figure 1 lottery in a time-saving state is executed. A right-handed display is displayed during this fluctuation, prompting the player to obtain the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 52 (H), on the right sub display screen 64R, the arrival schedule information CD is enlarged, and an enlarged effect of being displayed straddling the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a is performed. By this effect, the player can easily recognize that the number of fluctuations has reached the ceiling and the time-saving game of the play time has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (I), the arrival schedule information CD continues to be expanded, and "play time mode start !!!" is displayed in the area inside the CD. This allows the player to know that he has entered a new mode. After that, the arrival schedule information CD disappears, and as shown in FIG. 52 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and after the hold digestion, the next variation of the special figure 2 is started. On the right sub display screen 64R, an image ND representing the remaining number of play times is displayed as "remaining 699". As a result, the player can know the remaining number of times of b time reduction.

[Ceiling arrival schedule suggestion production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect C. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect displays information (arrival schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of fluctuations (the number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 500 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). .. Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling. Of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effects C, FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (E) show an example in which the suggestion information SJ is not displayed in the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. In FIG. 53 (A), as in FIG. 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, the three hold icons 9A and the variable icons (3 hold icons 9A) and the variable icons ( The hold icon) 9C is displayed.

Similar to FIG. 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, the number of fluctuations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on is 10 times, and the value YC of the evening-over effect counter is 10 (YC = 10). .. The number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190 (TC = 190). That is, the power of the game machine 1 was turned off when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter was 200 on the previous day, and after the power was turned on the next day, the special figure was changed 10 times. In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 10, the third threshold value TH3 = 50, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 100 are set (stored) as threshold values for the evening counter. Further, a second threshold value TH2 = 200 is set (stored) as a threshold value for the ceiling effect counter. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

In FIG. 53 (A), when the value YC of the evening counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC = TH1 = 10), the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). ) Is smaller than or not. Then, when TC is smaller than TH2 (TC <TH2), a random number is acquired, and execution / non-execution of the display effect of the suggestion information SJ is determined according to the random number value. Here, the suggestion information SJ is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 60%). FIG. 53 (B) illustrates a state in which the fluctuation is completed without displaying the suggestion information SJ on the display screen 7a. When TC is TH2 or more (TC ≧ TH2), the random value is not acquired and the suggestion information SJ is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). When this suggestion information SJ is displayed, the player indicates that the game machine 1 has not been ram-cleared from the previous day to today, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached continues from the previous day. You can know.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 53 (B), as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the sub control board 90 is set when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC). = TH3 = 50), it is determined whether or not the arrival schedule information CD is displayed. When the arrival schedule information CD is not displayed, the arrival schedule information CD is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 53 (C). Here, the arrival schedule information CD whose counter value is "150" is newly displayed. If the arrival schedule information CD is already displayed, the arrival schedule information CD is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (D), it arrives at a predetermined timing after the arrival schedule information CD is displayed until the fluctuation ends (until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed). The display of the schedule information CD disappears. It should be noted that the arrival schedule information CD may disappear after the special figure 1 fluctuation is repeated a plurality of times after being displayed. After repeating the special FIG. 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 53 (D), as shown in FIG. 53 (E), the sub control board 90 is set when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC). = TH4 = 100), the arrival schedule information CD is displayed again. At this point, the counter value is "100". After that, the arrival schedule information CD is continuously displayed until the counter value becomes "0", and then the same effects as in FIGS. 52 (G) to 52 (J) are executed.

FIGS. 53 (F) to 53 (J) show examples in which the arrival schedule information CD and the suggestion information SJ are displayed and disappear at different timings in the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. Similar to FIG. 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, the number of fluctuations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on is 10 times, and the value YC of the evening-over effect counter is 10 (YC = 10). .. The number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190 (TC = 190). That is, the power of the game machine 1 was turned off when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter was 200 on the previous day, and after the power was turned on the next day, the special figure was changed 10 times. In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 10, the third threshold value TH3 = 50, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 100 are set (stored) as threshold values for the evening counter. Further, a second threshold value TH2 = 200 is set (stored) as a threshold value for the ceiling effect counter. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

FIG. 53 (F) corresponds to FIG. 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. In FIG. 53 (F), in the sub control board 90, when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC = TH1 = 10), the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). ) Is smaller than or not. Then, when TC is smaller than TH2 (TC <TH2), the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 53 (F). On the other hand, when TC is TH2 or more (TC ≧ TH2), the suggestion information SJ is not displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 52 (B)). The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). When this suggestion information SJ is displayed, the player indicates that the game machine 1 has not been ram-cleared from the previous day to today, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached continues from the previous day. You can know. Unlike FIGS. 51 (B) to 51 (C) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, the suggestion information SJ does not move to the right sub display screen 64R after being displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the arrival schedule information CD is not displayed because the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the entire right sub display screen 64R.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 53 (F), as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the sub-control board 90 is set when the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC). = TH3 = 50), it is determined whether or not the arrival schedule information CD is displayed. Then, when the arrival schedule information CD is not displayed, it is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. If it has already been displayed, the display of the arrival schedule information CD is continued. Here, since the arrival schedule information CD was not displayed, it is newly displayed with the counter value "150".

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 53 (G), as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4. Judgment (YC = TH4 = 100). When YC = TH4, the display of the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD displayed on the right sub display screen 64R is erased, and the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD are newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 53 (H), as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the sub control board 90 determines whether or not the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the fifth threshold value TH5. Judgment (YC = TH5 = 150). When YC = TH5, the display of the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD displayed on the display screen 7a is turned off. As a result, the player cannot know when to reach the ceiling and can increase the feeling of excitement.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 53 (I), as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value YC of the evening counter becomes equal to the sixth threshold value TH6. Judgment (YC = TH6 = 180). When YC = TH6, the arrival schedule information CD is displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the display of the arrival schedule information CD is continued until "0". When the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD becomes "0", the main control board 80 changes the gaming state from the normal state (normal probability state and non-time saving state and low base state) to the time saving state (normal probability state and time saving state and high). Switch to the base state). As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 lottery is still performed at the time of entry, the special figure 1 lottery in a time-saving state is executed. A right-handed display is displayed during this fluctuation, prompting the player to obtain the special figure 2 hold. After that, the same as in FIGS. 52 (G) to 52 (J) described above.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect of suggesting the ceiling arrival schedule.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a main control board 80 that switches the gaming state to a time saving state when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches a specific number of times (500 times in this case). In the normal state, when the number of fluctuations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on reaches the first predetermined number (FIG. 52: YC = 50, FIG. 53: YC = 50), the remaining number until the specified number is reached. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the arrival schedule information CD, which is information related to the number of fluctuations, is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 53, in a normal state, the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine is turned on is equal to or less than the first predetermined number (FIG. 51: YC). = 10, FIG. 53: YC = 10), and when the number of remaining fluctuations (TC) until reaching a specific number of times is less than the threshold value (TH2), it is suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations is less than the threshold value. A second effect in which the suggestion information SJ is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, in the second production, when the suggestion information SJ is displayed, the arrival schedule information CD is also displayed, and the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. The arrival schedule information is continuously displayed until the number of subsequent fluctuations reaches the first predetermined number of times (YC = 50). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the suggestion information SJ is displayed in the second effect, the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on after the second effect is the second. When the third predetermined number of times (YC = 100) is greater than one predetermined number of times (YC = 50), the display of the suggestion information SJ disappears while the display of the arrival schedule information CD is continued. Can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the second effect, the suggestion image (star-shaped graphic image) is displayed on the display screen 7a and then displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. The movement is performed, and the suggestion image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R by the movement, and the arrival schedule information CD is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, in the second effect, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on becomes the second predetermined number (YC = 10), it is specified. Although the number of remaining fluctuations (TC) until the number of times is reached is less than the threshold value (TH2), the suggestion information SJ may not be displayed. According to this configuration, when the suggestion information SJ is not displayed, the player can be made to think whether the remaining number of fluctuations has not reached the threshold value or is not displayed even though it has reached the threshold value. It is possible to improve the interest by making the player crazy.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effects A to C, the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. However, the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L instead of the right sub display screen 64R. Further, one of the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the other on the left sub display screen 64L. Further, at least one of them may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effects A to C, the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD were represented as images having a shape. However, the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD are not limited to images having a shape as long as the contents are notified to the player. For example, the suggestion information SJ and the arrival schedule information CD may be notified by a part of the display screen 7a changing to a specific color, or may be notified by light emission. Further, for example, the notification may be made by changing the color, form, position, or the like of the image already displayed. In the arrival schedule information CD, the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached may be expressed as a percentage of the whole, or the ratio may be expressed by a meter. In addition, the remaining number of fluctuations may be qualitatively expressed as "still", "a little more", or a color change.

[Modification 3]
In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, then moves toward the right sub display screen 64R and is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. However, the suggestion information SJ may not move toward the right sub display screen 64R, but may be displayed on the display screen 7a, then disappear once, and then newly displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. The arrival schedule information CD may be displayed by fading in or by frame-in. Alternatively, it may be displayed after issuance.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a gaming state switching means for switching the gaming state to the second gaming state when the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches a specific number of times.
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the gaming machine is turned on reaches the first predetermined number, the arrival schedule information which is the information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached is displayed. The first production to be performed can be performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the gaming machine is turned on becomes the second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the specific number of times is less than the threshold value. When the number of fluctuations is small, a second effect in which suggestive information suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations is less than the threshold value is displayed can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
In the second effect, when the suggestion information is displayed, the arrival schedule information is also displayed, and when the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine reaches the first predetermined number of times. The arrival schedule information is continuously displayed until
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-3.
When the suggestion information is displayed in the second effect, after the second effect, the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine is turned on becomes the third predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times. Occasionally, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the display of the suggestion information disappears while the display of the arrival schedule information is continued.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
A game machine according to aspect A1-3 or aspect A1-4.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means.
The display of the suggestion information means that the suggestion image appears.
In the second effect, the suggestion image is displayed on the first display means, then moved to the second display means, and the suggestion image is displayed on the second display means by the movement. The arrival schedule information is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-5.
In the second effect, when the number of fluctuations after the game machine is turned on reaches the second predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached is smaller than the threshold value. However, the suggestion information may not be displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), the play time (low probability time reduction state) shifts. This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The special character appearance effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. This special character appearance effect is executed after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, during a variation effect of the decorative symbol in a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special character appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

The special character appearance effects A to C are executed when the following conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.
Condition 1: The number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on is the threshold TH1 (10 in this embodiment).
Condition 2: The value YC of the evening effect counter is a fluctuation that is equal to or less than the threshold value TH2 (200 in this embodiment).
That is, the special character appearance effects A to C are performed when the special symbol changes when the value YC of the evening-over effect counter becomes 10 (YC = 10) (the value of YC is updated at the end of the change). This fluctuation is the 10th fluctuation after the power of the game machine 1 is turned off when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 200 on the previous day and the power is turned on the next day. Further, at the time of this fluctuation (at the start of fluctuation), the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 190 times, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190 (TC = 190).

[Special character appearance production A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the special character appearance effect A. The special character appearance effect A of FIG. 54 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol, and as described above, when the number of variations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on becomes 10 times, the special symbol changes. That is, it is an effect at the time of fluctuation when the value YC of the evening effect counter becomes 10. At this time, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190, that is, if the special symbol fluctuates 190 times, the play time is entered. Although the display of the hold icon and the variable icon is omitted in FIG. 54, these icons are actually displayed.

In the special character appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the play time suggestion image appearance effect is performed. In this play time suggestion image appearance effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 appears on the right sub display screen 64R, and then the play time suggestion image XA1 moves from the right sub display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. The play time suggestion image XA1 is an image suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within a predetermined number of times (here, the threshold value TH1: 200) until the play time is reached, and is an image representing a ally character. This play time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the above chance image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the play time arrival number display effect is performed. In this play time arrival number display effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the play time suggestion image XA1 is displayed at a position different from the play time suggestion image XA1 displayed on the display screen 7a. The time arrival count image XA2 is displayed. The play time arrival number image XA2 is an image suggesting the remaining number of times until the change number of the special symbol reaches the play time. In the example of FIG. 54, the play time arrival number image XA2 is represented as "190 times until the play time".

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the play time suggestion image is retired. In this play time suggestion image exit appearance, the play time suggestion image XA1 exits (is deleted) from the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 in a state where the play time arrival count image XA2 is continuously displayed.
After that, the variation of the special symbol accompanied by the special character appearance effect A ends, but the play time arrival number image XA2 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a until the play time is reached or the jackpot is hit.

[Special character appearance production B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the special character appearance effect B. The special character appearance effect B in FIG. 55 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol, and as described above, when the number of variations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on becomes 10 times, the special symbol changes. That is, it is an effect at the time of fluctuation when the value YC of the evening effect counter becomes 10. At this time, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190, that is, if the special symbol fluctuates 190 times, the play time is entered. Although the display of the hold icon and the variable icon is omitted in FIG. 55, these icons are actually displayed.

In the special character appearance effect B, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the play time suggestion image appearance effect is performed. In this play time suggestion image appearance effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 appears on the right sub display screen 64R, and then the play time suggestion image XA1 moves from the right sub display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. The play time suggestion image XA1 is an image suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within a predetermined number of times (here, the threshold value TH1: 200) until the play time is reached, and is an image representing a ally character. This play time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the above chance image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the play time suggestion image is retired. In this play time suggestion image exit appearance, the play time suggestion image XA1 exits (is deleted) from the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the play time arrival number display effect is performed. In this play time arrival number display effect, the play time arrival number image XA2 is displayed at a position different from the play time suggestion image XA1 displayed on the display screen 7a. The play time arrival number image XA2 is an image suggesting the remaining number of times until the change number of the special symbol reaches the play time. In the example of FIG. 55, the play time arrival number image XA2 is represented as "190 times left until the play time".

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), an image association effect is performed. In this image mapping effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 appears again on the display screen 7a, and the play time suggestion image XA1 is associated with the play time arrival count image XA2 continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed.
After that, the variation of the special symbol accompanied by the special character appearance effect B ends, but the play time arrival number image XA2 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a until the play time is reached or the jackpot is hit.

[Special character appearance production C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the special character appearance effect C. The special character appearance effect C in FIG. 56 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol, and as described above, when the number of variations of the game machine 1 after the power is turned on becomes 10 times, the special symbol changes. That is, it is an effect at the time of fluctuation when the value YC of the evening effect counter becomes 10. At this time, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190, that is, if the special symbol fluctuates 190 times, the play time is entered. Although the display of the hold icon and the variable icon is omitted in FIG. 56, these icons are actually displayed.

In the special character appearance effect C, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56B, the play time suggestion image appearance effect is performed. In this play time suggestion image appearance effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 appears on the right sub display screen 64R, and then the play time suggestion image XA1 moves from the right sub display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. The play time suggestion image XA1 is an image suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within a predetermined number of times (here, the threshold value TH1: 200) until the play time is reached, and is an image representing a ally character. This play time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the above chance image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the play time suggestion image is retired. In this play time suggestion image exit appearance, the play time suggestion image XA1 exits (is deleted) from the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), the play time arrival number display effect is performed. In this play time arrival number display effect, the play time arrival number image XA2 is displayed at a position different from the play time suggestion image XA1 displayed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the play time arrival number image XA2 is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The play time arrival number image XA2 is an image suggesting the remaining number of times until the change number of the special symbol reaches the play time. In the example of FIG. 56, the play time arrival number image XA2 is represented as "190 times left until the play time".

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), an image association effect is performed. In this image association effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 appears on the left sub display screen 64L, and the play time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the play time arrival count image XA2 continuously displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. It is displayed so that it can be attached.
After that, the variation of the special symbol accompanied by the special character appearance effect C ends, but the play time arrival number image XA2 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a until the play time is reached or the jackpot is hit.

[Modification example]
If the above conditions 1 and 2 are not satisfied, the special character appearance effects A to C are not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character appearance effects A to C may be performed when only the condition 1 is satisfied, or may be performed when only the condition 2 is satisfied.

Further, even if the special character appearance effects A to C are desired to be performed because the above conditions 1 and 2 are not satisfied, even if the above conditions 1 and 2 are not satisfied, the power is turned on. When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special character appearance effects A to C may be performed.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot probability is about 1 / 397.1, and the integer part of the probability denominator of the jackpot probability is 397. Then, in the play time suggestion images XA1 of the special symbol character appearance effects A to C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within the number of integer parts (397 times) of the probability denominator of the jackpot probability until the play time after the power is turned on. The configuration may be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in the special character appearance effect A, even if the play time suggestion image XA1 leaves the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64, the play time arrival number image XA2 is continuously displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the play time suggestion image XA1 exits from the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64, the play time arrival count image XA2 may also be deleted.

[Effect example]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance effects A to C, after the power is turned on, the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of fluctuations, and then, in the predetermined fluctuation, the predetermined position of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. At (first position), the play time arrival count image XA2 is displayed, and at a position (second position) different from the position where the play time arrival count image XA2 on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 is displayed. The play time suggestion image XA1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the play time suggestion image XA1 and the play time arrival count image XA2 suddenly appear in a predetermined fluctuation after the power is turned on, so that the player suddenly increases the expectation for entering the play time. It is possible to give a feeling of surprise and a feeling of excitement of the game at the same time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the play time suggestion image XA1 and the play time arrival number image XA2 are displayed in association with each other in the special symbol character appearance effects B to C. According to this configuration, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation for the play time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance effects B to C, the play time arrival number image XA2 is performed after the play time suggestion image XA1 exits. According to this configuration, the play time suggestion image XA1 and the play time arrival count image XA2 are displayed at different timings, so that the player can further amplify the expectation for the play time and improve the interest of the game. Can be made to.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance effects A to C, in the play time arrival number image XA2, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the first threshold TH1 (10 times) after the power is turned on. Sometimes done. According to this configuration, after the power is turned on, the player can give the player a feeling of excitement until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first threshold value TH1, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance effects A to C, when the play time suggestion image XA1 has the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the first threshold TH1 (10 times) after the power is turned on. It is done in. According to this configuration, after the power is turned on, the player can give the player a feeling of excitement until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first threshold value TH1, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The gaming machine is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. When the gaming state is the first gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state shifts to the second gaming state.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the remaining number of times suggesting the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times at the first position of the display means.
The second display effect provides a suggestion image suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within the first number of times until the predetermined number of times is reached at a second position different from the first position. It is a production to display
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the suggestion image and the remaining number of times display in association with each other at the first position.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-2.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed after the display of the suggestion image in the second display effect disappears.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-3.
In the combination effect, the remaining number display in the first display effect is displayed when the number of times of the special symbol becomes the second number after the power of the game machine is turned on.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-4.
In the combination effect, the suggestion display in the second display effect is displayed when the number of times of the special symbol becomes the second number after the power of the game machine is turned on.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-5.
The jackpot probability in the game machine is 1 / N (N is a number larger than 1).
The first number of times is the same as the integer part of N.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hit notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. This hit notification effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hit notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen of the image display device 7 is included. The image is displayed on 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Hit notification effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the hit notification effect A. The hit notification effect is an effect executed when a big hit is notified during or after the special figure change. Here, after the jackpot game, the game state is switched to the time saving state (low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state), and the special figure 1 variation is executed in the time saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 57A, the sub-control board 90 displays the effect mode selection screen on the display screen 7a during the ending effect of the jackpot game. The effect mode selection screen includes an effect mode selection image MSG, a button image BTN, an effective period image TBI, and an operation promotion image RND.

The effect mode selection image MSG is an image for selecting the effect mode to be displayed at the time of the variable effect in the time saving state after the big hit game. The selection of the effect mode is to select one of the preset main display contents, effect contents, story contents, etc. displayed during the variable effect. Here, as an example, two effect modes, "effect mode A" and "effect mode B", are displayed in a selectable manner. The "effect mode A" is a mode in which a special effect is executed, and the "effect mode B" is a mode in which a battle effect is executed.

The button image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. The valid period image TBI is a meter image showing the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar showing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "selection", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect mode selected from the effect mode selection image MSG is switched. The panel showing the selected effect mode changes color so that it can be identified. The effect mode (effect mode in which the panel is active) selected when the operation valid period expires is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch between a plurality of effect modes, and executes the selected effect mode. Here, an example in which "effect mode A" is selected will be described. When the effect mode is selected, the ending effect of the jackpot game ends, and the variation of the special figure 1 in the time saving state starts. On the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection screen is switched to the variable display screen of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. When the select button 68 is operated during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the sub control board 90 displays the effect setting screen on the right sub display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 57 (B). To do.

The effect setting screen includes a setting selection image EG, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND. The setting selection image EG is an image for selecting the effect setting of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. The selection of the effect setting is to select one of the preset effect, effect frequency, effect mode, screen setting, and the like. Here, as an example, "flashy" and "plain" production settings are displayed in a selectable manner. "Flashy" is a setting in which the production effect and the production mode are flashy and the production frequency is high, and "plain" is a setting in which the production effect and the production mode are modest and the production frequency is low. The button image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "selection", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect setting selected from the setting selection image EG is switched. The panel showing the selected effect setting changes color so that it can be identified. The effect setting (effect setting in which the panel is active) selected by the operation of the effect button 63 or the select button 68 is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch a plurality of effect settings, and executes the selected effect settings. Here, an example in which "flashy" is selected will be described. While the effect setting screen is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a has a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, two hold icons 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. It is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the light emitting effect is executed on the right sub display screen 64R. .. Specifically, a light emitting image FL representing a mode (light emitting mode) in which light is emitted to a part (predetermined region) of the right sub display screen 64R is displayed once, and then as shown in FIG. 57 (D). , The display disappears. As a result, a part of the right sub-display screen 64R emits light, and the effect of returning to the original state is executed. When this light emission effect appears, the hit is confirmed. That is, it is notified that the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a hit by this light emission effect. As described above, in the hit notification effect of the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, while the light emitting image FL that notifies the jackpot is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. Will be done. In other words, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is notified to the player before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop in the jackpot mode.

After this light emission effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of "333". The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the hit mode without going through the reach mode. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were variable displays, are suddenly stopped and displayed at "333". This makes it possible to surprise the player. In addition to this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may have a variable display, but the display disappears due to fading out, and "333" may be framed in from below the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode disappear, and the first movable accessory 14 retracted to the left end of the display screen 7a moves to the right. Start moving to. As shown in FIG. 57 (G), when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right, the notification screen is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a after the first movable accessory 14 has passed. The hit notification screen includes a character image of "hit !!!" and a background image of a specific color. The hit notification screen is displayed in order from the left side in the area after the first movable accessory 14 has passed. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (H), when the first movable accessory 14 reaches the right end of the display screen 7a, it stops once there. At this time, the entire display screen 7a becomes a hit notification screen. After that, the first movable accessory 14 starts moving to the left, and at the same time, the display of the hit notification screen disappears from the right side of the hit notification screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (I), the first movable accessory 14 returns to the original retracted position on the left side. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed again in the jackpot mode on the display screen 7a.

[Hit notification effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the hit notification effect B. The hit notification effect B has a different effect setting selected on the effect setting screen than that of the hit notification effect A. The hit notification effect is an effect executed when a big hit is notified during or after the special figure change. Here, after the jackpot game, the game state is switched to the time saving state (low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state), and the special figure 1 variation is executed in the time saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 58A, the effect mode selection screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the sub control board 90 during the ending effect of the jackpot game. The effect mode selection screen includes an effect mode selection image MSG, a button image BTN, an effective period image TBI, and an operation promotion image RND.

The effect mode selection image MSG is an image for selecting the effect mode to be displayed at the time of the variable effect in the time saving state after the big hit game. The selection of the effect mode is to select one of the preset main display contents, effect contents, story contents, etc. displayed during the variable effect. Here, as an example, two effect modes, "effect mode A" and "effect mode B", are displayed in a selectable manner. The "effect mode A" is a mode in which a special effect is executed, and the "effect mode B" is a mode in which a battle effect is executed.

The button image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. The valid period image TBI is a meter image showing the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar showing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "selection", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect mode selected from the effect mode selection image MSG is switched. The panel showing the selected effect mode changes color so that it can be identified. The effect mode (effect mode in which the panel is active) selected when the operation valid period expires is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch between a plurality of effect modes, and executes the selected effect mode. Here, an example in which "effect mode A" is selected will be described. When the effect mode is selected, the ending effect of the jackpot game ends, and the variation of the special figure 1 in the time saving state starts. On the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection screen is switched to the variable display screen of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. When the select button 68 is operated during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the sub control board 90 displays the effect setting screen on the right sub display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 58 (B). To do.

The effect setting screen includes a setting selection image EG, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND. The setting selection image EG is an image for selecting the effect setting of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. The selection of the effect setting is to select one of the preset effect, effect frequency, effect mode, screen setting, and the like. Here, as an example, "flashy" and "plain" production settings are displayed in a selectable manner. "Flashy" is a setting in which the production effect and the production mode are flashy and the production frequency is high, and "plain" is a setting in which the production effect and the production mode are modest and the production frequency is low. The button image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "selection", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect setting selected from the setting selection image EG is switched. The panel showing the selected effect setting changes color so that it can be identified. The effect setting (effect setting in which the panel is active) selected by the operation of the effect button 63 or the select button 68 is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch a plurality of effect settings, and executes the selected effect settings. Here, an example in which "plain" is selected will be described. While the effect setting screen is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a has a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, two hold icons 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. It is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the display of the effect setting screen disappears. After that, at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the notification image AH for notifying the hit is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. The broadcast image AH of the present embodiment is a star-shaped graphic image and is displayed at the lower right of the right sub display screen 64R. The broadcast image AH is continuously displayed after being displayed. When this broadcast image AH appears, the hit is confirmed. That is, with the appearance of the broadcast image AH, it is notified that the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a hit. As described above, in the hit notification effect of the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, while the notification image AH for notifying the jackpot is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. Will be done. In other words, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is notified to the player before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop in the jackpot mode.

After this hit notification effect, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. Here, the stop display is displayed in the mode of "333". The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the hit mode without going through the reach mode. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were variable displays, are suddenly stopped and displayed at "333". This makes it possible to surprise the player. In addition to this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may have a variable display, but the display disappears due to fading out, and "333" may be framed in from below the display screen 7a.

On the right sub display screen 64R, the display of the broadcast image AH continues. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode disappear, and the first movable accessory 14 retracted to the left end of the display screen 7a moves to the right. Start moving to. As shown in FIG. 58 (G), when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right, the notification screen is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a after the first movable accessory 14 has passed. The hit notification screen includes a character image of "hit !!!" and a background image of a specific color. The hit notification screen is displayed in order from the left side in the area after the first movable accessory 14 has passed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), when the first movable accessory 14 reaches the right end of the display screen 7a, it stops once there. At this time, the entire display screen 7a becomes a hit notification screen. After that, the first movable accessory 14 starts moving to the left, and at the same time, the display of the hit notification screen disappears from the right side of the hit notification screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the first movable accessory 14 returns to the original retracted position on the left side. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed again in the jackpot mode on the display screen 7a. From FIGS. 58 (D) to 58 (J), the display of the broadcast image AH continues on the right sub display screen 64R.

[Hit notification effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the hit notification effect C. The hit notification effect C has a different effect mode selected on the effect mode selection screen than that of the hit notification effect A. The hit notification effect is an effect executed when a big hit is notified during or after the special figure change. Here, after the jackpot game, the game state is switched to the time saving state (low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state), and the special figure 1 variation is executed in the time saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the sub-control board 90 displays the effect mode selection screen on the display screen 7a during the ending effect of the jackpot game. The effect mode selection screen includes an effect mode selection image MSG, a button image BTN, an effective period image TBI, and an operation promotion image RND.

The effect mode selection image MSG is an image for selecting the effect mode to be displayed at the time of the variable effect in the time saving state after the big hit game. The selection of the effect mode is to select one of the preset main display contents, effect contents, story contents, etc. displayed during the variable effect. Here, as an example, two effect modes, "effect mode A" and "effect mode B", are displayed in a selectable manner. The "effect mode A" is a mode in which a special effect is executed, and the "effect mode B" is a mode in which a battle effect is executed.

The button image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. The valid period image TBI is a meter image showing the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar showing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "selection", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect mode selected from the effect mode selection image MSG is switched. The panel showing the selected effect mode changes color so that it can be identified. The effect mode (effect mode in which the panel is active) selected when the operation valid period expires is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch between a plurality of effect modes, and executes the selected effect mode. Here, an example in which "effect mode B" is selected will be described. When the effect mode is selected, the ending effect of the jackpot game ends, and the variation of the special figure 1 in the time saving state starts. On the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection screen is switched to the variable display screen of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. When the select button 68 is operated during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the sub control board 90 displays the effect setting screen on the right sub display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 59 (B). To do.

The effect setting screen includes a setting selection image EG, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND. The setting selection image EG is an image for selecting the effect setting of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. The selection of the effect setting is to select one of the preset effect, effect frequency, effect mode, screen setting, and the like. Here, as an example, "flashy" and "plain" production settings are displayed in a selectable manner. "Flashy" is a setting in which the production effect and the production mode are flashy and the production frequency is high, and "plain" is a setting in which the production effect and the production mode are modest and the production frequency is low. The button image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "selection", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect setting selected from the setting selection image EG is switched. The panel showing the selected effect setting changes color so that it can be identified. The effect setting (effect setting in which the panel is active) selected by the operation of the effect button 63 or the select button 68 is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch a plurality of effect settings, and executes the selected effect settings. Here, an example in which "flashy" is selected will be described. While the effect setting screen is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a has a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, two hold icons 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. It is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become the reach mode on the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3", respectively, and become "3 ↓ 3". After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the battle effect is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed, and an image in which they fight is displayed. “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is reduced and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining the display, and temporarily stops at that position. “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the right sub display screen 64R while maintaining the display, and temporarily stops at that position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear, and the first movable accessory 14 retracted to the left end of the display screen 7a starts moving to the right. As shown in FIG. 59 (F), when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right, a special background image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a after the first movable accessory 14 has passed. The special background image is a background image different from the background image when the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed, and suggests that the result of the match between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is finally notified. .. The special background image is displayed in order from the left side in the area after the first movable accessory 14 has passed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), when the first movable accessory 14 reaches the right end of the display screen 7a, it stops once there. At this time, the entire display screen 7a becomes a special background image. After that, the first movable accessory 14 starts moving to the left, and at the same time, the display of the special background image disappears from the right side of the special background image. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the first movable accessory 14 returns to the original retracted position on the left side. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), the result of the match between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. Here, a state in which the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB is illustrated. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed again in the jackpot mode on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hit notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (C) and 58 (D), the hit is notified in a state where the variable display of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The effect of 1 can be executed. According to this configuration, since the player can be surprised, it is possible to improve the interest by a novel production that has never existed before.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D) (E) and 58 (D) (E), after the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R go through the reach mode. It is possible to execute the second effect of stopping at the hit symbol (for example, "333"). According to this configuration, since the player can be surprised, it is possible to improve the interest by a novel production that has never existed before.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (E) to (J) and 58 (E) to (J), after the second effect, the game machine 1 stops at a winning symbol (for example, "333"). The display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are displayed disappears, and the first movable accessory 14 moves from the leftmost retracted position to the rightmost advanced position, and after the third effect, the first movable It is possible to perform a fourth effect in which the accessory 14 moves from the advance position to the evacuation position, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at the hit symbol (for example, "333") are displayed again. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), in the first effect, a hit notification is performed by emitting light from a predetermined area of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a sub-control board 90 capable of switching a plurality of effect settings, and is one of the plurality of effect settings. When the setting (flashy) is selected, in the first effect, the hit notification is performed by emitting light in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, and the second effect is the other one of the plurality of effect settings. When the setting (plain) is selected, in the first effect, the hit notification is performed by displaying the notification image AH on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the first effect, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hit notification is on the right. This is done on the sub display screen 64R. According to this configuration, a person who concentrates on the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the display screen 7a does not notice, and only a person who knows this effect can notice the hit notification, giving a sense of superiority. It can be granted, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the sub control board 90 selects a setting selection image EG representing a plurality of effect settings and an effect setting on the right sub display screen 64R. The operation means image BTN of is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hit notification effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hit notification effects A and B, it has been described that after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, they are fixedly stopped in the hit mode without becoming the reach mode. However, in the hit notification effects A and B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be fixedly stopped in the hit mode via the reach mode after the variable display.

[Modification 2]
In the hit notification effects A to C, the effect setting screen has been described as being displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. However, the effect setting screen may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or on the display screen 7a instead of the right sub display screen 64R. Further, the effect mode selection screen has been described as being displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the effect mode selection screen may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L instead of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the hit notification effect A, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), a light emitting image FL representing a mode (light emitting mode) in which light is emitted is displayed on a part (predetermined region) of the right sub display screen 64R. It was assumed that a hit notification would be given. However, the notification of the hit is not limited to the mode of displaying the image having a shape as long as the hit is notified to the player. For example, a hit may be notified when a part of the right sub display screen 64R changes to a specific color, or a hit may be notified when the entire right sub display screen 64R emits light. Further, for example, the hit may be notified by changing the color, form, position, or the like of the image that has already been displayed. In the case of visually notifying the hit notification, not only the right sub display screen 64R may be used, but also the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a may be used. In addition, the hit may be notified by the generation of sound or the movement of the accessory. Further, the hit may be notified by causing the light emitting unit included in the accessory to emit light.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
While the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed, the first effect of notifying the hit can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the decorative symbol hits and stops at the symbol without going through the reach mode.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-2 is further described.
It is equipped with a movable accessory that can move between the first position and the second position.
After the second effect, the display of the decorative symbol stopped at the hit symbol disappears, and the movable accessory moves from the first position to the second position.
After the third effect, it is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the movable accessory moves from the second position to the first position and the decorative symbol stopped at the hit symbol is displayed again. Nah,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
In the first effect, the hit notification is performed by emitting light from a predetermined area of the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4 is further described.
Equipped with a switching means that can switch between multiple production settings
When the first setting, which is one of the plurality of effect settings, is selected, in the first effect, the hit notification is performed by emitting light from a predetermined area of the display means.
When the second setting, which is the other one of the plurality of effect settings, is selected, in the first effect, the hit notification is performed by displaying a specific image on the display means. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means.
In the first effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the first display means, and the notification of the hit is performed by the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-6 is further described.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the operation means.
The switching means causes the second display means to display a setting selection image representing the plurality of effect settings and the operation means image for selecting the effect setting.
A game machine characterized by that.

The sounded reach effect will be described below with reference to FIG. 60, and the silent reach effects A to B will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The sounded reach effect and the silent reach effect A to B are executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sound reach effect or the soundless reach effect A to B, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 of the image display device 7. The sound reach effect includes an effect based on the variation pattern of the loss and an effect based on the variation pattern of the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 60 below, the effect based on the variation pattern of the loss is shown. Further, the silent reach effects A and B also include an effect based on the variation pattern of the loss and an effect based on the variation pattern of the jackpot. In FIGS. 61 and 62 below, the effect based on the variation pattern of the jackpot is shown.

[Sound reach production]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining a sound reach effect. The sounded reach effect of FIG. 60 is an effect with the same variation in a special symbol.

In the sound reach effect, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), first, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 60, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the reach effect 1 is performed. In this reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) of "Jaquin Jakeen" is output from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the reach effect 2 is performed. In this reach effect 2, the ally character is transformed, and the transformed ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the production sound output from the speaker 67 is changed, and the production sound (sound effect) of "Pyrrolilon ~ ♪ Pyrrolilon ~ ♪" is output from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the reach effect 3 is performed. In this reach effect 3, the transformed ally character XB1 is continuously displayed. At this time, the effect sound output from the speaker 67 is changed, and the effect sound (sound effect) of "chakin chakeen" is output from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the loss notification effect is performed. In this loss notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as loss symbols. In the example of FIG. 60 (E), the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the symbol "6", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the symbol "6". ing.

In the reach effects 1 to 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be used to form the reach state. As an example of the reach state, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are set to the same symbol "6", and the decorative symbol 8C is changed.

[Silence reach production A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the silent reach effect A. The silent reach effect A in FIG. 61 is an effect with the same variation in the special symbol.

In the silent reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 61, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the reach effect 1 is performed. In this reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) of "Jaquin Jakeen" is output from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the reach effect 2 is performed. In this reach effect 2, the ally character is transformed, and the transformed ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the output of the effect sound (sound effect) from the speaker 67 disappears, that is, the effect is silent. Even during this silent effect, the display screen 7a does not freeze (without darkening or becoming a still image), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate and the operation effect of the ally character XB1. Is also done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the reach effect 3 is performed. In this reach effect 3, the transformed ally character XB1 is continuously displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) is output again from the speaker 67. In this case, the speaker 67 outputs a production sound (sound effect) of "chakin chakeen".

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as jackpot symbols. In the example of FIG. 61 (E), the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7". ing.

In the reach effects 1 to 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be used to form the reach state. As an example of the reach state, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are set to the same symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8C is changed.

[Silence reach production B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the silent reach effect B. The silent reach effect B in FIG. 62 is an effect with the same variation in the special symbol.

In the silent reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the patrol lamp image XB2 is displayed. In FIG. 62, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the reach effect 1 is performed. In this reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) of "Jaquin Jakeen" is output from the speaker 67. Further, in the reach effect 1, the patrol lamp image XB2 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the reach effect 2 is performed. In this reach effect 2, the ally character is transformed, and the transformed ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the output of the effect sound (sound effect) from the speaker 67 disappears, that is, the effect is silent. Further, in this reach effect 2, the patrol lamp image XB2 is continuously displayed. Even during this silent effect, the display screen 7a does not freeze (without darkening or becoming a still image), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate and the operation effect of the ally character XB1. Is also done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a one-shot notification effect is performed. In this one-shot notification effect, the transformed ally character XB1 is continuously displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) is output again from the speaker 67. In this case, the effect sound (sound effect) of "picking" is output from the speaker 67. Further, in this one-shot notification effect, the patrol lamp image XB2 is continuously displayed, and the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 changes from the silent state of the reach effect 2 to the sound state of the one-shot notification effect. Blinks (or lights up).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the reach effect 3 is performed. In this reach effect 3, the transformed ally character XB1 is continuously displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) is output again from the speaker 67. In this case, the speaker 67 outputs a production sound (sound effect) of "Jaquin Jakeen". Further, in the reach effect 3, the patrol lamp image XB2 is continuously displayed, and the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 is also continuously blinking (or lit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as jackpot symbols. In the example of FIG. 62 (E), the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the symbol "7". ing.

In the reach effects 1 to 3 and the one-shot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form the reach state. It may be. As an example of the reach state, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are set to the same symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8C is changed.

Further, the sounded reach effect and the silent reach effect A have the same length of the reach effect 1 to 3, the same core display effect pattern, and the same appearance display effect. Is formed in. That is, the sounded reach effect and the silent reach effect A have the same display position, dialogue, background, effect, etc. of the ally character XB1 in the reach effects 1 to 3, and are different depending on whether or not there is a silent effect. Is. Not limited to this, the sounded reach effect and the silent reach effect A may have different display effects in the parts other than the reach effects 1 to 3, and in the parts of the reach effects 1 to 3. However, the configuration may be partially different (for example, the display position of the ally character XB1 is different, the effect or a part of the background is different).

Further, in the sound effect, the sound effect part 2 in which the patrol lamp image XB2 is displayed at the same display position as the silent reach effect B may be performed. In this case, the sounded reach effect part 2 and the silent reach effect B have the same lengths of the reach effects 1 to 3 and the same main display effect pattern, respectively, and the appearance of the display effect. Are formed in the same way. That is, in the sound reach effect part 2 and the silent reach effect B, the display position of the patrol lamp image XB2, the display position of the ally character XB1, the dialogue, the background, the effect, etc. are formed in the same manner in the reach effects 1 to 3. It is a different production depending on whether or not there is a silent production. Not limited to this, the sounded reach effect and the silent reach effect B may have different display effects in the parts other than the reach effects 1 to 3, and in the parts of the reach effects 1 to 3. However, the configuration may be partially different (for example, the display position of the ally character XB1 is different, the effect or a part of the background is different).

[Modification example]
The silent reach effects A and B have a higher expectation of a big hit than the sound reach effects. The above-mentioned silent reach effects A and B are big hits, but they may be performed when the loss fluctuates. Even in this case, the silent reach effects A and B have a higher expectation of a big hit than the sounded reach effects.
In the above silent reach effect B, in the one-shot notification effect, the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 blinks (or lights up) at the timing when the silent state of the reach effect 2 changes to the sound state of the one-shot notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the silent state of the reach effect 2 may be changed to the sounded state after the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 blinks (lights up), or the silent state of the reach effect 2 may be changed to the sounded state. After the state is reached, the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 may blink (light).
In the above-mentioned silent reach effects A and B, the display screen 7a is configured so as not to freeze (does not darken or becomes a still image) during the silent effect of the reach effect 2, but it may freeze (darkens). It may be a still image).

[Effect example]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the reach effect 1, the silent reach effects A and B, which perform the silent effect in the reach effect 2, are performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a momentary sense of discomfort and improve the expectation for the reach effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the reach effect 1, a sounded reach effect is performed in which the reach effect 2 which is a sound effect is performed. The silent reach productions A and B have higher expectations for big hits than the sound reach production. According to this configuration, the player feels uncomfortable when the silent effect occurs, and the jackpot expectation is high at that time, so that the discomfort can be associated with the expectation for the jackpot, and a new approach to improving the player's interest. Can be provided. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the silent reach effects A and B, after the reach effect 2 which is a silent effect, a jackpot notification effect for displaying a jackpot symbol is performed. According to this configuration, the player feels uncomfortable when the silent effect occurs, and then hits the jackpot. Therefore, the sense of discomfort and the expectation for the jackpot can be more strongly related, and a new approach for improving the player's interest can be achieved. Can be provided. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the silent reach effect B, after the reach effect 2 which is a silent effect, and before the jackpot notification effect of displaying the jackpot symbol, a one-shot notification effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player is surprised to announce the big hit after feeling uncomfortable with the occurrence of the silent effect, so that the uncomfortable feeling and the expectation for the big hit can be more strongly associated with each other. , Can provide a new approach to improving the interest of the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the silent reach effect B, the patrol lamp image XB2 is blinked (or lit) in a one-shot notification effect to simply notify the player of the jackpot. According to this configuration, the player is notified of the big hit by blinking the patrol lamp image XB2 as a surprise after feeling uncomfortable with the occurrence of the silent effect, so that the uncomfortable feeling and the expectation for the big hit are more strongly related. It is possible to provide a new approach to improving the interest of the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
It is a game machine that can execute multiple effects,
A display means that can execute multiple display effects,
A production sound generating means that can produce a production sound,
With
As one of the plurality of effects, the first effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed.
The first effect is an effect in which the display means performs the first display effect and the effect sound generating means performs a sound effect that produces the effect sound.
The second effect is an effect in which the display means performs the second display effect and the effect sound generating means does not produce the effect sound.
A first combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed.
In the first combination effect, the first effect is performed, and then the second effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1.
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed.
The third effect is an effect of performing the second display effect in the display means and performing a sound effect of producing the effect sound from the effect sound generating means.
A second combination effect including the first effect and the third effect may be performed.
In the second combination effect, the first effect is performed, and then the third effect is performed.
The first combination effect is an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the second combination effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-2.
As one of the plurality of effects, a fourth effect may be performed.
The fourth effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol in the display means.
The first combination effect may include the fourth effect.
In the first combination effect, the fourth effect is performed after the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-3.
As one of the plurality of effects, a fifth effect may be performed.
The fifth effect is an effect of displaying a one-shot notification image that announces that it is a big hit in the display means.
The first combination effect may include the fifth effect.
In the first combination effect, the fifth effect is performed before the fourth effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-4.
In the fifth effect in the first combination effect, the one-shot notification image is displayed in a predetermined area determined in advance in the display means.
The one-shot notification image is a blinking image.
A game machine characterized by that.

The vibe effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. The vibe effects A to C are executed after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the vibration effects A to C, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64, and the vibration motor arranged inside the effect button 63 is vibrated at a predetermined timing. At this time, the vibration sound as a sound effect is also produced from the speaker 67.
Further, when the number of hold icons 9A on the display screen 7a is changed from 2 to 3 (when the number of hold icons of the first start port is changed from 2 to 3), the sub control board 90 uses the vibration motor. An additional hold vibe effect that vibrates (vibrates the effect button 63) can be performed. Then, in the game machine 1, the player can set whether or not to perform this additional hold vibration effect during the customer waiting mode (during the demo screen) or while the special symbol is changing. On the sub display screen 64, the player can select whether or not to set the player to perform the additional hold vibe effect while the player is in the customer waiting mode (during the demo screen) or the special symbol is changing.

[Vibe production A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the vibe effect A. The vibe effect A of FIG. 63 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol.

In the vibe effect A, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, two hold icons 9A and one variation icon 9C are displayed. That is, in this decorative symbol variation effect, since two hold icons 9A are displayed, it represents a state in which there are two holds. A schematic diagram of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of FIG. 63 (A), showing the state of the effect button 63 of the game machine 1. The hold icon 9A is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the hold display additional effect 1 is performed. In this hold display additional effect 1, a game ball is additionally entered into the first start port 20, one hold icon 9A is added, three are displayed, and the ally character XC1 is displayed. The ally character XC1 is a character that can be transformed into a plurality of stages, and in FIG. 63 (B), it is in the state of the first stage, and the jackpot expectation is the lowest.
Further, in the hold additional effect 1, since the hold display has changed from two to three, the additional hold vibe effect is performed. The situation is shown on the right side of FIG. 63 (B). That is, in this additional hold vibe effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor to generate a vibrating sound of "boo-boo". In this case, the sound effect of "boo-boo" is also output from the speaker 67. Further, at the time of the additional hold vibe effect, the effect button 63 emits light, and the predetermined portion of the effect button 63 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the hold display additional effect 2 is performed. In this hold display additional effect 2, a game ball is additionally entered into the first start opening 20, and one hold icon 9A is added to display four. In addition, the ally character XC1 of the first stage is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the hold change effect is performed. In this hold change effect, the hold icon 9A added in the hold display additional effect 2 is set as a look-ahead target, and the hold icon 9A is changed from white to red. In the example of FIG. 63 (D), the hold icon 9A that has been changed to hold is indicated by cross-hatching. Further, in this hold change effect, a look-ahead vibration effect is also performed in which the vibration motor is vibrated to vibrate the effect button 63 at the time of hold change (pre-reading). In this look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor, and a vibrating sound of "buboo" is emitted. In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a "buboo" sound effect. The vibration pattern of this look-ahead vibration effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect. Further, at the time of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 63 emits light. However, the predetermined portion of the effect button 63 does not rotate in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) as in the case of the additional hold vibe effect.

After that, every time the hold decreases from the state of hold 4 (the state of four hold icons 9A) (every time the number of hold icons 9A decreases by one), the look-ahead vibration effect is performed. Not limited to this, when the hold decreases from the state of hold 4 (the state of 4 hold icons 9A) (when the number of hold icons 9A decreases by 1), the look-ahead vibration effect is not performed. May be good.

Further, in the above-mentioned vibe effect A, when the hold icon 9A is added from two to three, the additional hold vibe effect is performed, but when the hold icon 9A changes from four to three, the additional hold vibe effect is performed. Do not do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of hold icons 9A changes from four to three, an additional hold vibe effect may be performed.

In the above-mentioned vibe effect A, an additional hold vibe effect is performed in the same change of the special symbol, and then a look-ahead effect and a look-ahead vibe effect are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is performed in the same change of the special symbol. And, the additional hold vibe effect may be performed during the look-ahead vibe effect, or the additional hold vibe effect may be performed after the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead vibe effect in the same variation of the special symbol.

Further, in the above-mentioned vibe effect A, an additional hold vibe effect may be performed at the time of the look-ahead vibe effect. In this case, the vibration pattern of the vibration motor is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect (boo-boo) and the vibration pattern of the look-ahead vibration effect (bubu-) (for example, a vibration pattern having a time signature of 337). ) May be used.

[Vibe production B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the vibe effect B. The vibe effect B of FIG. 64 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol.

In the vibe effect B, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, two hold icons 9A and one variation icon 9C are displayed. That is, in this decorative symbol variation effect, since two hold icons 9A are displayed, it represents a state in which there are two holds. A schematic diagram of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of FIG. 64 (A), showing the state of the effect button 63 of the game machine 1. The hold icon 9A is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the hold display additional effect 1 is performed. In this hold display additional effect 1, a game ball is additionally entered into the first start port 20, one hold icon 9A is added, three are displayed, and the ally character XC1 is displayed. The ally character XC1 is a character that can be transformed into a plurality of stages, and in FIG. 64 (B), it is in the state of the first stage, and the jackpot expectation is the lowest.
Further, in the hold additional effect 1, since the hold display has changed from two to three, the additional hold vibe effect is performed. The situation is shown on the right side of FIG. 64 (B). That is, in this additional hold vibe effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor to generate a vibrating sound of "boo-boo". In this case, the sound effect of "boo-boo" is also output from the speaker 67. Further, at the time of the additional hold vibe effect, the effect button 63 emits light, and the predetermined portion of the effect button 63 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, the ally character XC1 is transformed into a state of the second stage different from the state of the first stage, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is improved. The ally character XC1 in the second stage has a higher expectation of a big hit than the ally character XC1 in the first stage. Further, in this chance-up effect, a chance-up vibe effect is also performed in which the vibration motor is vibrated to vibrate the effect button 63 at the time of the chance-up effect. In this chance-up vibration effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor, and a vibrating sound of "bububu" is emitted. In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a "bubbly" sound effect. The vibration pattern of this chance-up vibe effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibe effect and the look-ahead vibe effect. Further, the effect button 63 emits light at the time of the chance up vibe effect. However, the predetermined portion of the effect button 63 does not rotate in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) as in the case of the additional hold vibe effect.

In the above-mentioned vibe effect B, an additional hold vibe effect is performed in the same fluctuation of the special symbol, and then a chance-up effect and a chance-up vibe effect are performed. An additional hold vibe effect may be performed during the up effect and a chance up vibe effect, or an additional hold vibe effect may be performed after the chance up effect and the chance up vibe effect in the same variation of the special symbol. Good.

Further, in the above-mentioned vibe effect B, an additional hold vibe effect may be performed at the time of the chance up vibe effect. In this case, the vibration pattern of the vibration motor is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect (boo-boo), the vibration pattern of the look-ahead vibration effect (bu-boo), and the vibration pattern of the chance-up vibration effect (bubu-boo) (for example). , Long vibe. Boooooo).

[Vibe production C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the vibe effect C. The vibe effect C of FIG. 65 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol.

In the vibe effect C, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, two hold icons 9A and one variation icon 9C are displayed. That is, in this decorative symbol variation effect, since two hold icons 9A are displayed, it represents a state in which there are two holds. A schematic diagram of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of FIG. 65 (A), showing the state of the effect button 63 of the game machine 1. The hold icon 9A is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the chance-up effect 1 is performed. In this chance-up effect 1, the button image XC3 is displayed. This button image XC3 is a so-called chance-up image suggesting that the jackpot expectation has improved, and is displayed as "super hot" inside the button image. Further, the button image XC3 is an image for urging the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the chance-up effect 2 is performed. In this chance-up effect 2, the button image XC3 is continuously displayed. Further, in the chance-up effect 2, a game ball is additionally inserted into the first starting port 20, one hold icon 9A is added and three are displayed, and an additional hold vibe effect is performed. The situation is shown on the right side of FIG. 64 (B). That is, in this additional hold vibe effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor to generate a vibrating sound of "boo-boo". In this case, the sound effect of "boo-boo" is also output from the speaker 67. Further, at the time of the additional hold vibe effect, the effect button 63 emits light, and the predetermined portion of the effect button 63 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the chance up vibe effect 3 is performed. In this chance-up effect 3, when the player who sees the button image XC3 operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display of the button image XC3 is erased, and the ally character XC1 in the second stage state appears. It is a production that suggests that the jackpot expectation has improved. The ally character XC1 has a higher expectation of a big hit than the ally character XC1 in the first stage. Further, in the chance-up effect 3, at the time of the chance-up effect 3, a chance-up vibration effect is also performed in which the vibration motor is vibrated to vibrate the effect button 63. In this chance-up vibration effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor, and a vibrating sound of "bububu" is emitted. In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a "bubbly" sound effect. The vibration pattern of this chance-up vibe effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibe effect and the look-ahead vibe effect. Further, the effect button 63 emits light at the time of the chance up vibe effect. However, the predetermined portion of the effect button 63 does not rotate in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) as in the case of the additional hold vibe effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned vibe effect C, if the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect are at the same timing, the vibration pattern (boo-boo) of the additional hold vibe effect is prioritized to perform the vibe effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the additional hold vibe effect and the chance-up vibe effect are at the same timing, the vibration pattern (bubu-boo) of the chance-up vibe effect may be prioritized to perform the vibe effect. Further, when the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect are at the same timing, the vibe effect may be performed with a vibration pattern (for example, bubbly bub) different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect. Good.

[Modification example]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the vibration motor is installed on the effect button 63, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inside of a predetermined accessory, the inside of the handle, or the inside of an operating means (for example, a lever) different from the button. It may be installed in.
In the above-mentioned vibe effects A to C, in the additional hold vibe effect, when vibrating, the predetermined part of the effect button 63 rotates according to the vibration, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined part of the effect button 63 pops out. Or it may be dented.
The vibration pattern of the look-ahead vibration effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect, but is not limited to this, and the vibration pattern of the look-ahead vibration effect may be the same as the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect.
The vibration pattern of the chance up vibe effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibe effect, but it is not limited to this, and the vibration pattern of the chance up vibe effect may be the same as the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibe effect. Good.
During the same fluctuation of the special symbol, the additional hold vibe effect, the look-ahead vibe effect, and the chance up vibe effect may be performed. In this case, it may be an additional hold vibe effect → look-ahead vibe effect → chance up vibe effect, an additional hold vibe effect → chance up vibe effect → look-ahead vibe effect, or a look-ahead vibe effect → additional hold vibe effect → chance up. It may be a vibe effect, a look-ahead vibe effect → a chance-up vibe effect → an additional hold vibe effect, a chance-up vibe effect → a look-ahead vibe effect → an additional hold vibe effect, or a chance-up vibe effect → an additional hold. Vibe production →, may be a look-ahead vibration production.
In the above-mentioned vibe effects A to C, when the hold display changes from 2 to 3 (when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3), an additional hold vibe effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , When the hold display changes from 3 to 4 (when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4), or when the hold display changes from 1 to 2 (the number of holds increases from 1 to 2) When), or when the hold display changes from 0 to 1 (when the number of holds increases from 0 to 1), the additional hold vibe effect may be performed.

[Effect example]
In the game machine 1, the maximum number of holdings for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, and even if the ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting opening 21 with four holdings, the ball is held. Did not increase, and the injection of the game ball into these starting ports for the purpose of entering the ball was a wasteful act, which was a disadvantageous act for the player. In this way, the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21 with four holds is also referred to as "over entry into the start opening".
In the above-mentioned vibe effects A to C, when the hold icon 9A increases from two to three (when the number of holds increases from two to three), the effect button 63 is vibrated. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a player who is not concentrating on the game, a player who is playing in a noisy environment, or the like by vibration to increase the number of holds by a predetermined number (for example, hold 3) or more. It is possible to suppress over-ball entry into the starting port, thereby suppressing the disadvantage of the player and promoting the player to enjoy the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the vibe effects A to C, a vibration motor is installed inside the effect button 63 so that the effect button 63 can be vibrated. According to this configuration, since the vibration motor is set on the effect button 63 that the player often contacts, the player vibrates when the number of holdings exceeds a predetermined number (for example, holding 3). It becomes easier to detect, it is possible to suppress over-ball entry into the starting port, and accordingly, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player and promote the player to enjoy the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the game machine 1, the player can select whether or not to set the additional hold vibe effect while the special symbol is changing. According to this configuration, the player can set whether or not to perform the additional hold vibe effect even while the special symbol is changing, so that the degree of freedom of the game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned vibe effect A, in the same fluctuation, after the hold icon 9A is added and the additional hold vibe effect is performed, the look-ahead vibe effect is performed when the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) is performed. There is. According to this configuration, the look-ahead vibe effect is performed during the look-ahead effect after the hold vibe effect within the same fluctuation. Therefore, when the player experiences these effects and then experiences the hold vibe effect, the game It is possible to give a person a sense of expectation for a jackpot for a hold vibe effect (because the look-ahead effect is originally an effect that gives a sense of expectation for a jackpot), and it is possible to improve the interest of the hold vibe effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned vibe effects B and C, in the same fluctuation, after the hold icon 9A is added and the additional hold vibe effect is performed, the chance up vibe effect is performed when the chance up effect is performed. .. According to this configuration, the chance-up vibe effect is performed during the chance-up effect after the hold vibe effect within the same fluctuation. Therefore, when the player experiences these effects and then experiences the hold vibe effect, , It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for the jackpot for the hold vibe production (because the chance-up production is originally a production that gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot), and it is possible to improve the interest of the hold vibe production. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned vibe effects A to C, the additional hold vibe effect is performed when the display of the hold icon 9A changes from two to three (when the number of holds changes from two to three). According to this configuration, when the firing is stopped immediately due to the additional hold vibe effect, the number of holds is increased even when the game ball remaining in the game board enters the first start port 20. Since it is possible to hold one even if there are three, it is possible to suppress over-entry into the starting port. As a result, the disadvantage of the player can be suppressed, the player can be promoted to enjoy the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
It is a game machine that can execute multiple effects,
A display means that can execute multiple display effects,
With vibrating means to vibrate,
As one of the plurality of effects, the first effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed.
The first effect is an effect in which the display means performs hold display up to a predetermined number.
The second effect is an effect of performing the first vibration effect in which the vibrating means vibrates.
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first effect and the second effect are performed, and when the hold display increases from the first number to the second number in the first effect, the second effect The production is done,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-1.
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player
The vibrating means can be arranged in the operating means to vibrate the operating means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-2.
During the change of the special symbol, the first setting in which the combination effect is performed during the change of the special symbol after the change, and the second setting in which the combination effect is not performed during the change of the special symbol after the change. A setting means capable of setting either of the above is provided.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-3.
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a fourth effect may be performed.
The third effect is an effect in which, when there is the hold display, the display means performs a look-ahead effect on the target hold corresponding to the specific hold display among the hold displays.
The fourth effect is a vibration effect different from the first vibration effect, and is an effect of performing a second vibration effect in which the vibrating means vibrates.
The combination effect may include the third effect and the fourth effect.
In the combination effect, after the first effect and the second effect are performed, the third effect and the fourth effect are performed, and the fourth effect is the third effect. Performed when the pre-reading effect is being performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-3 or the aspect XC-4.
As one of the plurality of effects, a fifth effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a sixth effect may be performed.
The fifth effect is an effect of performing a chance-up effect suggesting that the jackpot expectation is increased in the display means.
The sixth effect is a vibration effect different from the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, and is an effect of performing a third vibration effect in which the vibration means vibrates.
The combination effect may include the fifth effect and the sixth effect.
In the combination effect, after the first effect and the second effect are performed, the fifth effect and the sixth effect are performed, and the sixth effect is the fifth effect. Performed when the chance-up production is being performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-4 or the aspect XC-5.
The first number is two less than the upper limit of the predetermined number of the hold display.
The second number is one less than the upper limit of the predetermined number of the hold display.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, fluctuation icon change effects A to C over a plurality of fluctuations will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. In FIGS. 66 to 68, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings. ..

This variation icon change effect over a plurality of variations can be executed over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by a decorative symbol. That is, it includes an instruction that the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command and a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and executes a variation icon change effect over a plurality of variations. In this case, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Examples of various background images used in the variation icon change effect over a plurality of variations include city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations will be described, the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations, and the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations will be described in order.

[Variation icon change effect A over multiple fluctuations]
The variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations. The variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations is performed over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by a decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, as described above, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a relaxed manner (for example, about 5 mm). After moving (at low speed) (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative symbol is about to move is changed by canceling the stop display of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol gradually speeds downward from low speed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while increasing the speed, and changes at high speed. Such a start mode of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "normal variation start mode".

On the other hand, when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, unlike the normal variation start mode, the stop-displayed decorative symbol is in front of the right side of the decorative symbol as if the coin rotates. If you rotate a little toward the side (from the left side of the decorative design to the rear side), it will rotate a little from the right side of the decorative design to the rear side (from the left side of the decorative design to the front side), and the decorative design will reappear. The display mode faces the front, and when the decorative design is rotated slightly from the right side to the rear side (from the left side of the decorative design to the front side), the decorative design is displayed from the right side to the front side (from the left side of the decorative design). The display mode is such that the decorative pattern faces the front again by rotating a little (toward the rear side). After performing such a series of rotations a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (in other words, the display mode in which the decorative symbol is about to move due to the cancellation of the stop display of the decorative symbol), the decoration The design changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side, resulting in a display mode in which the design fluctuates at a high speed. Such a start mode of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "specific variation start mode".

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It has become. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad. The icon 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only two stocked icons. The white spherical variable icon 9C and the two white spherical holding icons 9A have the same shape and the same size.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a so that the visibility is not hindered by other images. It has become. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the visibility is improved by other images. Since it is not hindered, it can always be visually recognized even in the fluctuation icon change effect A over a plurality of fluctuations.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. Each color of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon is a bright color.

The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). All these colors are bright colors. Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the icon of the character A having a white aura and the hit expectation of the icon of the character B having a white aura are the same as the hit expectation of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich). Is set high. All these colors are bright colors.

In FIG. 66 (A), for example, a city image is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, then, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbol is displayed. During the variation effect (variation display) of, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect. When the game ball enters the first starting port 20, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning. The white spherical variable icon 9C and the three white spherical holding icons 9A have the same shape and the same size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display). Although the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations has already been started by the look-ahead effect, the hold change for the three white spherical hold icons 9A (change to another color, to another type) up to this point. No change) has occurred, and no change (change to another color, change to another type) has occurred for the variable icon 9C.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative symbol is usually arranged according to the change start mode. Fluctuation production (variation display) is started. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Moving. As a result, there are two white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "4". When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is out of alignment, the variation effect (variation display) ends, but the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed as it is without disappearing from the display screen 7a. Immediately before the end of the variation effect (variation display), the game ball enters the first start port 20, so that the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, whereas the hold icon 9A is displayed after the change icon change effect A over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are those before the change icon change effect A over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect.

It should be noted that the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of changes has already been started by the look-ahead effect, and the intermediate decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (stopped display) at a specific symbol (here, the odd number "3"). , The state in which the variation icon 9C, which should normally disappear from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display), is maintained without disappearing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad starts moving to the change display position 9Cd, the decorative symbol changes effect (variation display) according to the normal change start mode. ) Is started. The shape of the hold icon 9A has the same shape as the shape of the variable icon 9C (that is, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The hold icon 9A that has started to move moves so as to be on the front side of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Moving. As a result, there are two white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, whereas the hold icon 9A is displayed after the change icon change effect A over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect. The hold icon 9A is before the start of the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations due to the look-ahead effect.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the entire display screen 7a becomes a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap. It disappears from 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd change from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect A over a plurality of fluctuations is started by the look-ahead effect, and the color changes from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. While it can be visually recognized as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is a change icon change effect A over a plurality of changes due to the look-ahead effect. Is before the start of, and the brightness does not change at all before and after darkening, and it can be visually recognized as a bright white spherical hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), when a large message image MG having a bright blue color is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, the effect image of a specific color is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. A bright blue flash appears (displays), and when this flash diminishes, the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C, which becomes the bright blue color (specific color) of this flash, is accompanied by an effect image 9Cz with a bright blue aura. It is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd, and the display mode is such that a spotlight is applied to the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color). The region SPR to which the spotlight is applied has a display mode in which the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C gradually spreads concentrically around the variable icon 9C. The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied is the image before darkening (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image returning from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color) (background image, variable display). The position 9Cd) can be easily visually recognized, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display) can also be visually recognized on the front side of the background image.

Further, when the area SPR to which the spotlight is applied becomes the largest, the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are partially overlapped with each other. In this state, only a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad in the area SPR where the spotlight is applied becomes an image (color) before being darkened. This part (the image (color) before only a part of it is darkened) can be easily visually recognized. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR remains as a bright white spherical hold icon 9A. Therefore, the bright white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad can be continuously and easily visually recognized. The boundary region between the inside and the outside of the region SPR to which the spotlight is applied is a region to which a gradation process is performed in which the color gradually becomes dim from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight on, and when all the images are returned to the darkened image, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "8". When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is out of alignment, the variation effect (variation display) ends, but the blue spherical variation icon 9C is displayed as it is without disappearing from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is the one after the change icon change effect A over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, whereas the first hold display is displayed. As described above, the hold icon 9A displayed at the position 9Ad is before the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect.

It should be noted that the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of changes has already been started by the look-ahead effect, and the intermediate decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (stopped display) at a specific symbol (here, the odd number "7"). , The state in which the variation icon 9C, which should normally disappear from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display), is maintained without disappearing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad starts moving to the change display position 9Cd, here, unlike the normal change start mode, the specific change start mode The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative icon is started. The shape of the hold icon 9A has the same shape as the shape of the variable icon 9C (that is, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The hold icon 9A that has started to move moves so as to be on the front side of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. As a result, there is one white spherical hold icon 9A with the lowest expectation of hitting.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect A over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), the entire display screen 7a becomes a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap. It disappears from 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd change from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect A over a plurality of fluctuations is started by the look-ahead effect, and the color changes from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), when the message image MG having a bright red color near the center of the display screen 7a is displayed in large size, the effect image of a specific color is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. When a bright red flash appears (displays) and diminishes, the bright red spherical variable icon 9C, which becomes the bright red color (specific color) of this flash, is accompanied by an effect image 9Cz with a bright red aura. It is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd, and the display mode is such that a spotlight is applied to the bright red spherical variable icon 9C. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color). The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied has a display mode that gradually spreads concentrically around the bright red spherical variable icon 9C. The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied is the image before darkening (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image returning from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color) (background image, variable display). The position 9Cd) can be easily visually recognized, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display) can also be visually recognized on the front side of the background image.

Further, when the area SPR to which the spotlight is applied becomes the largest, it is in a state of overlapping with a part of the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second reserved display position 9Ad in the area SPR where the spotlight is applied is an image (color) before being darkened, and this part (only a part of the image before being darkened) ( Color)) can be easily visually recognized. In the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR, the dim white spherical hold icon 9A after darkening returns to the bright white spherical hold icon 9A before darkening, and this bright The white spherical hold icon 9A can be easily visually recognized. The boundary region between the inside and the outside of the region SPR to which the spotlight is applied is a region to which a gradation process is performed in which the color gradually becomes dim from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight on, and when all the images are returned to the darkened image, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped by the number "2" and moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "2". It is displayed and moves slowly in the vertical direction in small steps, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued. By forming the reach, the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations ends.

Here, the reach was formed, but the reach was not formed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is out of alignment, the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations ends. Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started again according to the normal change start mode. The Rukoto.

Following FIG. 66 (M), a battle effect (not shown) is started thereafter. In the battle effect, the ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and the enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. , 4th hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, if the ally character wins and the enemy character is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). , The big hit game (big hit production) is started after that. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation The variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end. Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started again according to the normal change start mode. The Rukoto.

As described above, although the variable icon 9C is normally used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display), in the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations, It is used as a notice to inform the start of the production that is about to begin over (straddling) multiple fluctuations.

Further, in the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the variation in FIG. 66 (E), the next variation is the normal variation start mode in FIG. 66 (F). In FIG. 66 (H), the variable icon 9C changes, but the reach is not formed. In contrast, in FIG. 66 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the number "7". When displayed, the next variation was started in the specific variation start mode in FIG. 66 (J), the variation icon 9C was changed in FIG. 66 (L), and the reach was further formed in FIG. 66 (K). In other words, in the variation icon change effect A over a plurality of variations, when the next variation is started by the normal variation start mode, it is possible to suggest the change of the variation icon 9C, and the next variation is started by the specific variation start mode. It is possible to suggest a change in the variable icon 9C and to suggest that a reach is formed.

[Variation icon change effect B over multiple fluctuations]
Next, the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations. The variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations is performed over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by a decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, as described above, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a relaxed manner (for example, about 5 mm). After moving (at low speed) (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative symbol is about to move is changed by canceling the stop display of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol gradually speeds downward from low speed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while increasing the speed, and changes at high speed. Such a start mode of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "normal variation start mode".

On the other hand, when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, unlike the normal variation start mode, the stop-displayed decorative symbol is in front of the right side of the decorative symbol as if the coin rotates. If you rotate a little toward the side (from the left side of the decorative design to the rear side), it will rotate a little from the right side of the decorative design to the rear side (from the left side of the decorative design to the front side), and the decorative design will reappear. The display mode faces the front, and when the decorative design is rotated slightly from the right side to the rear side (from the left side of the decorative design to the front side), the decorative design is displayed from the right side to the front side (from the left side of the decorative design). The display mode is such that the decorative pattern faces the front again by rotating a little (toward the rear side). After performing such a series of rotations a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (in other words, the display mode in which the decorative symbol is about to move due to the cancellation of the stop display of the decorative symbol), the decoration The design changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side, resulting in a display mode in which the design fluctuates at a high speed. Such a start mode of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "specific variation start mode".

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It has become. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad. The icon 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only two stocked icons. The white spherical variable icon 9C and the two white spherical hold icons have the same shape and the same size.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a so that the visibility is not hindered by other images. It has become. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or when the decoration pattern variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the visibility is improved by other images. Since it is not hindered, it can always be visually recognized even in the fluctuation icon change effect B over a plurality of fluctuations.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. Each color of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon is a bright color.

The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). All these colors are bright colors. Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the icon of the character A having a white aura and the hit expectation of the icon of the character B having a white aura are the same as the hit expectation of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich). Is set high. All these colors are bright colors.

In FIG. 67 (A), for example, a city image is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, then, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the decorative symbol is displayed. During the variation effect (variation display) of, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect. When the game ball enters the first starting port 20, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning. The white spherical variable icon 9C and the three white spherical holding icons 9A have the same shape and the same size.

When the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect, the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad arranged at the position farthest from the variation display position 9Cd is the first. The display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order toward the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad is repeated. In other words, the hold icon 9A moves upward in order from the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad to the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. By propagating the display mode of jumping (jumping), the display mode (wave display mode) is such that the three hold icons 9A are wavy. At this time, unlike the three hold icons 9A, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd does not have a display mode of jumping upward, and is placed on the variable display position 9Cd. Is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". When the stop display is confirmed and the display is deviated, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display). Since the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations has already been started by the look-ahead effect, the display mode (wave display mode) in which the three hold icons 9A are wavy is continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed as a jump (jump) display mode in which the hold icon 9A is jumped upward. When the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the mode, the variable icon 9C jumps (jumps) upward. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode of jumping upward is continuously (interrupted). It is supposed to be done (without).

In addition, the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) moves to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of jumping (jumping) upward. Then, when the variation icon 9C is set, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started according to the normal variation start mode. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) continues the display mode of jumping upward (jumping), and the first hold display position. The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of moving to 9Ad and jumping upward (jumping) is held in the second hold while continuing the display mode of jumping upward. Move to the display position 9Ad. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) is continuous (without interruption). Even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward is continuous. It is supposed to be done (without interruption). As a result, there are two white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning.

In this way, when the three white spherical hold icons 9A move to the right (shift movement), the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) is continuously (uninterrupted). Therefore, the wavy display mode (wave display mode) is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "4" (the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed). It may be just before the number "4" is stopped and displayed.), The variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd suddenly jumps upward (jumps) as a display mode of jumping upwards. The display mode is changed from the display mode to the display mode placed at the variable display position 9Cd. In other words, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd stops jumping (jumping) in the upward direction and stops above the variable display position 9Cd. After that, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" and is confirmed and displayed, the fluctuation effect (variation display) ends, but the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C remains on the display screen 7a. It will be displayed. Immediately before the end of the variation effect (variation display), the game ball enters the first start port 20, so that the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning. The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad also has a display mode of jumping upward, and is continued in a display mode (wave display mode) in which the three hold icons 9A undulate. There is.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, whereas it is after the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are before the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect.

It should be noted that the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of changes has already been started by the look-ahead effect, and the intermediate decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (stopped display) at a specific symbol (here, the odd number "3"). , The state in which the variation icon 9C, which should normally disappear from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display), is maintained without disappearing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as a display mode for jumping upwards jumps upwards (jumps). When the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started while continuing the mode, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started according to the normal variation start mode. The shape of the hold icon 9A has the same shape as the shape of the variable icon 9C (that is, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The hold icon 9A, which has started moving while continuing the display mode of jumping upward, moves so as to be in front of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd.

At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) continues the display mode of jumping (jumping) in the direction of the first hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping) is displayed in the second hold display while continuing the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping). Move to position 9Ad. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) is continuous (without interruption). Even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward is continuous. It is supposed to be done (without interruption). As a result, there are two white spherical hold icons 9A having the lowest expectation of hitting, and the display mode (wave display mode) in which the two hold icons 9A are wavy is continued.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, whereas the hold icon 9A is displayed after the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect. The hold icon 9A is before the start of the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations due to the look-ahead effect.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the entire display screen 7a becomes a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap. It disappears from 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd change from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, and the color changes from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. While it can be visually recognized as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is a change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes due to the look-ahead effect. Is before the start of, and the brightness does not change at all before and after darkening, and it can be visually recognized as a bright white spherical hold icon 9A. Even at this point, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad also have a display mode of jumping upward. It is continued, and the two hold icons 9A are continued in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), when the message image MG having a bright blue color and having a bright blue color is displayed in a large size near the center of the display screen 7a, the effect image of a specific color is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. A bright blue flash appears (displays), and when this flash diminishes, the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C, which becomes the bright blue color (specific color) of this flash, is accompanied by an effect image 9Cz with a bright blue aura. It is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd, and the display mode is such that a spotlight is applied to the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color). The region SPR to which the spotlight is applied has a display mode in which the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C gradually spreads concentrically around the variable icon 9C. The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied is the image before darkening (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image returning from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color) (background image, variable display). The position 9Cd) can be easily visually recognized, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display) can also be visually recognized on the front side of the background image. Even at this point, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad also have a display mode of jumping upward. It is continued, and the two hold icons 9A are continued in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

Further, when the area SPR to which the spotlight is applied becomes the largest, the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are partially overlapped with each other. In this state, only a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad in the area SPR where the spotlight is applied becomes an image (color) before being darkened. This part (the image (color) before only a part of it is darkened) can be easily visually recognized. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR remains as a bright white spherical hold icon 9A. Therefore, the bright white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad can be continuously and easily visually recognized. The boundary region between the inside and the outside of the region SPR to which the spotlight is applied is a region to which a gradation process is performed in which the color gradually becomes dim from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight on, and when all the images are returned to the darkened image, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "8". When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is out of alignment, the variation effect (variation display) ends, but the blue spherical variation icon 9C is displayed as it is without disappearing from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, whereas the first hold display is displayed. As described above, the hold icon 9A displayed at the position 9Ad is before the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect.

It should be noted that the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations has already been started by the look-ahead effect, and the intermediate decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (stopped display) at a specific symbol (here, the odd number "7"). , The state in which the variation icon 9C, which should normally disappear from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display), is maintained without disappearing. Further, at this point as well, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad also have a display mode of jumping upward. It is continued, and the two hold icons 9A are continued in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed as a jump (jump) display mode in which the hold icon 9A is jumped upward. When the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started while continuing the mode, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started here according to the specific variation start mode, unlike the normal variation start mode. The shape of the hold icon 9A has the same shape as the shape of the variable icon 9C (that is, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The hold icon 9A, which has started moving while continuing the display mode of jumping upward, moves so as to be in front of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) continues the display mode of jumping (jumping) in the direction of the first hold display position 9Ad. Move to. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping) is continuous (without interruption). It has come to be called. As a result, there is one white spherical hold icon 9A with the lowest expectation of hitting.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap, as shown in FIG. 67 (K), the entire display screen 7a becomes a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap. It disappears from 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd change from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) suddenly changes to the first hold display position from the display mode of jumping (jumping) upward. The display mode is mounted on 9A. In other words, the variable icon 9C displayed at the first hold display position 9A stops the operation of jumping upward and stops above the first hold display position 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, and the color changes from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (L), when the message image MG having a bright red color near the center of the display screen 7a is displayed in large size, the effect image of a specific color is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. When a bright red flash appears (displays) and diminishes, the bright red spherical variable icon 9C, which becomes the bright red color (specific color) of this flash, is accompanied by an effect image 9Cz with a bright red aura. It is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd, and the display mode is such that a spotlight is applied to the bright red spherical variable icon 9C. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color). The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied has a display mode that gradually spreads concentrically around the bright red spherical variable icon 9C. The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied is the image before darkening (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image returning from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color) (background image, variable display). The position 9Cd) can be easily visually recognized, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display) can also be visually recognized on the front side of the background image.

Further, when the area SPR to which the spotlight is applied becomes the largest, it is in a state of overlapping with a part of the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second reserved display position 9Ad in the area SPR where the spotlight is applied is an image (color) before being darkened, and this part (only a part of the image before being darkened) ( Color)) can be easily visually recognized. In the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR, the dim white spherical hold icon 9A after darkening returns to the bright white spherical hold icon 9A before darkening, and this bright The white spherical hold icon 9A can be easily visually recognized. The boundary region between the inside and the outside of the region SPR to which the spotlight is applied is a region to which a gradation process is performed in which the color gradually becomes dim from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight on, and when all the images are returned to the darkened image, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped by the number "2" and moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "2". It is displayed and moves slowly in the vertical direction in small steps, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued. By forming the reach, the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations ends.

Here, the reach was formed, but the reach was not formed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is out of alignment, the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations ends. Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started again according to the normal change start mode. The Rukoto.

Following FIG. 67 (M), a battle effect (not shown) is started thereafter. In the battle effect, the ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and the enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. , 4th hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, if the ally character wins and the enemy character is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). , The big hit game (big hit production) is started after that. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation The variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end. Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started again according to the normal change start mode. The Rukoto.

As described above, although the variable icon 9C is normally used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display), in the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations, It is used as a notice to inform the start of the production that is about to begin over (straddling) multiple fluctuations.

Further, in the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the variation in FIG. 67 (E), the next variation is the normal variation start mode in FIG. 67 (F). In FIG. 67 (H), the variable icon 9C changes, but no reach is formed. In contrast, in FIG. 67 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the number “7” in the change. When displayed, the next variation was started in the specific variation start mode in FIG. 67 (J), the variation icon 9C was changed in FIG. 67 (L), and the reach was further formed in FIG. 67 (K). In other words, in the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations, when the next variation is started by the normal variation start mode, it is possible to suggest the change of the variation icon 9C, and the next variation is started by the specific variation start mode. It is possible to suggest a change in the variable icon 9C and to suggest that a reach is formed.

[Variation icon change effect C over multiple fluctuations]
Next, the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations. The variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations is performed over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by a decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, as described above, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a relaxed manner (for example, about 5 mm). After moving (at low speed) (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative symbol is about to move is changed by canceling the stop display of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol gradually speeds downward from low speed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while increasing the speed, and changes at high speed. Such a start mode of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "normal variation start mode".

On the other hand, when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, unlike the normal variation start mode, the stop-displayed decorative symbol is in front of the right side of the decorative symbol as if the coin rotates. If you rotate a little toward the side (from the left side of the decorative design to the rear side), it will rotate a little from the right side of the decorative design to the rear side (from the left side of the decorative design to the front side), and the decorative design will reappear. The display mode faces the front, and when the decorative design is rotated slightly from the right side to the rear side (from the left side of the decorative design to the front side), the decorative design is displayed from the right side to the front side (from the left side of the decorative design). The display mode is such that the decorative pattern faces the front again by rotating a little (toward the rear side). After performing such a series of rotations a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (in other words, the display mode in which the decorative symbol is about to move due to the cancellation of the stop display of the decorative symbol), the decoration The design changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side, resulting in a display mode in which the design fluctuates at a high speed. Such a start mode of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "specific variation start mode".

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It has become. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad. The icon 9A is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only two stocked icons. The white spherical variable icon 9C and the two white spherical hold icons have the same shape and the same size.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a so that the visibility is not hindered by other images. It has become. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the visibility is improved by other images. Since it is not hindered, it can always be visually recognized even in the fluctuation icon change effect C over a plurality of fluctuations.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. Each color of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon is a bright color.

The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). All these colors are bright colors. Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the icon of the character A having a white aura and the hit expectation of the icon of the character B having a white aura are the same as the hit expectation of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich). Is set high. All these colors are bright colors.

In FIG. 68 (A), for example, a city image is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, then, as shown in FIG. During the variation effect (variation display) of, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect. When the game ball enters the first starting port 20, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning. The white spherical variable icon 9C and the three white spherical holding icons 9A have the same shape and the same size.

When the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect, the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad arranged at the position farthest from the variation display position 9Cd is the first. The display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order toward the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad is repeated. In other words, the hold icon 9A moves upward in order from the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad to the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. By propagating the display mode of jumping (jumping), the display mode (wave display mode) is such that the three hold icons 9A are wavy. At this time, unlike the three hold icons 9A, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd does not have a display mode of jumping upward, and is placed on the variable display position 9Cd. Is maintained.

In the present embodiment, each time the hold icon 9A jumps upward (jumps), the white spherical hold icon 9A → the hold icon 9A of the character A having a white aura → the character having a white aura. The shape of the hold icon 9A is changed repeatedly in the order of the hold icon 9A of B → the white spherical hold icon 9A → ....

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". When the stop display is confirmed and the display is deviated, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display). Since the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations has already been started by the look-ahead effect, the display mode (wave display mode) in which the three hold icons 9A are wavy is continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed as a jump (jump) display mode in which the hold icon 9A is jumped upward. When the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the mode, the variable icon 9C jumps upward (jumps). That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode of jumping upward is continuously (interrupted). It is supposed to be done (without). Of course, in the present embodiment, each time the variable icon 9C jumps upward at the variable display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A → the hold icon 9A of the character A having a white aura → white. The shape of the hold icon 9A is changed repeatedly in the order of the hold icon 9A of the character B having the aura of the above → the white spherical hold icon 9A → ....

In addition, the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) moves to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of jumping (jumping) upward. Then, when the variation icon 9C is set, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started according to the normal variation start mode. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) continues the display mode of jumping upward (jumping), and the first hold display position. The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of moving to 9Ad and jumping upward (jumping) is held in the second hold while continuing the display mode of jumping upward. Move to the display position 9Ad. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) is continuous (without interruption). Even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward is continuous. It is supposed to be done (without interruption). As a result, there are two white spherical hold icons 9A with the lowest expectation of winning.

In this way, when the three hold icons 9A move to the right (shift movement), the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping) is performed continuously (without interruption), so that the icons undulate. Such a display mode (wave display mode) is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), before the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "4" (the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed). It may be just before the number "4" is stopped and displayed.), The variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd suddenly jumps upward (jumps) as a display mode of jumping upwards. From the display mode, the display mode is placed on the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C of the character A having a white aura is displayed. In other words, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd stops jumping (jumping) in the upward direction and stops above the variable display position 9Cd.

The variable icon 9C suddenly changes from a display mode in which it jumps upwards to a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd, and when it becomes the variable icon 9C of character A having a white aura, it becomes this. In conjunction with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad are fixed to the hold icon 9A of the character A having a white aura. , The display mode of jumping upwards is continued.

After that, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and when it is confirmed and displayed, the variation effect (variation display) ends, but the variation icon 9C of the character A with a white aura is displayed. It will be displayed as it is without disappearing from the screen 7a. Immediately before the end of the variation effect (variation display), the game ball enters the first start port 20, so that the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three hold icons 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad also has a display mode of jumping upward, and is continued in a display mode (wave display mode) in which the three hold icons 9A undulate. There is. However, since the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of fluctuations is started by the look-ahead effect, the change icon changes over a plurality of changes due to the look-ahead effect. Unlike the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which are before the start of the effect C, even if the hold icon 9A jumps upward (jump). Even if), the shape of the hold icon 9A does not change, and the white spherical hold icon 9A remains.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, whereas the hold icon 9A is displayed after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are before the start of the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes due to the look-ahead effect.

It should be noted that the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations has already been started by the look-ahead effect, and the intermediate decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (stopped display) at a specific symbol (here, the odd number "3"). , The state in which the variation icon 9C, which should normally disappear from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display), is maintained without disappearing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed as a jump (jump) display mode in which the hold icon 9A is jumped upward. When the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started while continuing the mode, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started according to the normal variation start mode. The shape of the hold icon 9A has the same shape as the shape of the variable icon 9C (that is, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are icons of the character A). The hold icon 9A, which has started moving while continuing the display mode of jumping upward, moves so as to be in front of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd.

At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) continues the display mode of jumping (jumping) in the direction of the first hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping) is displayed in the second hold display while continuing the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping). Move to position 9Ad. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) is continuous (without interruption). Even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad moves to the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upward is continuous. It is supposed to be done (without interruption). As a result, there are two hold icons 9A, and the display mode (wave display mode) in which the two hold icons 9A are wavy is continued.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is displayed after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, whereas it is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A is before the start of the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations due to the look-ahead effect.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the entire display screen 7a becomes a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap. It disappears from 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd change from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, and the color changes from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. While it can be visually recognized as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is a change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes due to the look-ahead effect. Is before the start of, and the brightness does not change at all before and after darkening, and it can be visually recognized as the hold icon 9A of the character A having a bright white aura. Even at this point, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad also have a display mode of jumping upward. It is continued, and the two hold icons 9A are continued in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), when the message image MG having a bright blue color and having a bright blue color is displayed in a large size near the center of the display screen 7a, the effect image of a specific color is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. A bright blue flash appears (displays), and when this flash weakens, a bright blue aura that becomes the bright blue color (specific color) of this flash appears. Character A's variable icon 9C is a bright blue aura. It is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having the effect image 9Cz, and the display mode is such that the spotlight is applied to the variable icon 9C of the character A having a bright blue aura. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color). The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied has a display mode that gradually spreads concentrically around the variable icon 9C of the character A having a bright blue aura. The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied is the image before darkening (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image returning from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color) (background image, variable display). The position 9Cd) can be easily visually recognized, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display) can also be visually recognized on the front side of the background image. Even at this point, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad also have a display mode of jumping upward. It is continued, and the two hold icons 9A are continued in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

Further, when the area SPR to which the spotlight is applied becomes the largest, the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are partially overlapped with each other. In this state, only a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad in the area SPR where the spotlight is applied becomes an image (color) before being darkened. This part (the image (color) before only a part of it is darkened) can be easily visually recognized. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR is still the hold icon 9A of the character A having a bright white aura. Therefore, the hold icon 9A of the character A having a bright white aura displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad can be continuously and easily visually recognized. The boundary region between the inside and the outside of the region SPR to which the spotlight is applied is a region to which a gradation process is performed in which the color gradually becomes dim from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight on, and when all the images are returned to the darkened image, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "8". When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is off, the variation effect (variation display) ends, but the variation icon 9C of the character A with the blue aura is displayed as it is without disappearing from the display screen 7a. It becomes a state.

As described above, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, whereas the first hold display is displayed. As described above, the hold icon 9A displayed at the position 9Ad is before the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations is started by the look-ahead effect.

It should be noted that the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of changes has already been started by the look-ahead effect, and the intermediate decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (stopped display) at a specific symbol (here, the odd number "7"). , The state in which the variation icon 9C, which should normally disappear from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display), is maintained without disappearing. Further, at this point as well, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad also have a display mode of jumping upward. It is continued, and the two hold icons 9A are continued in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed as a jump (jump) display mode in which the hold icon 9A is jumped upward. When the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started while continuing the mode, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started here according to the specific variation start mode, unlike the normal variation start mode. The shape of the hold icon 9A has the same shape as the shape of the variable icon 9C (that is, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are icons of the character A). The hold icon 9A, which has started moving while continuing the display mode of jumping upward, moves so as to be in front of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) continues the display mode of jumping (jumping) in the direction of the first hold display position 9Ad. Move to. That is, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of jumping upwards (jumping) is continuous (without interruption). It has come to be called. As a result, there is one hold icon 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap, as shown in FIG. 68 (K), the entire display screen 7a becomes a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap. It disappears from 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd change from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the display mode of jumping upward (jumping) suddenly changes to the first hold display position from the display mode of jumping (jumping) upward. The display mode is mounted on 9A. In other words, the variable icon 9C displayed at the first hold display position 9A stops the operation of jumping upward and stops above the first hold display position 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the change icon change effect C over a plurality of changes is started by the look-ahead effect, and the color changes from the color before darkening to the dim color after darkening. It can be visually recognized as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (L), when the message image MG having a bright red color near the center of the display screen 7a is displayed in large size, the effect image of a specific color is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. A bright red flash appears (displays), and when this flash weakens, a bright red aura that becomes the bright red color (specific color) of this flash appears. Character A's variable icon 9C has a bright red aura. It is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having the effect image 9Cz, and the display mode is such that the spotlight is applied to the variable icon 9C of the character A having a bright red aura. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color). The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied has a display mode that gradually spreads concentrically around the variable icon 9C of the character A having a bright red aura. The area SPR to which the spotlight is applied is the image before darkening (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image returning from the dim color after darkening to the color before darkening (bright color) (background image, variable display). The position 9Cd) can be easily visually recognized, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display) can also be visually recognized on the front side of the background image.

Further, when the area SPR to which the spotlight is applied becomes the largest, it is in a state of overlapping with a part of the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second reserved display position 9Ad in the area SPR where the spotlight is applied is an image (color) before being darkened, and this part (only a part of the image before being darkened) ( Color)) can be easily visually recognized. In the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR, the dim white spherical hold icon 9A after darkening returns to the bright white spherical hold icon 9A before darkening, and this bright The white spherical hold icon 9A can be easily visually recognized. The boundary region between the inside and the outside of the region SPR to which the spotlight is applied is a region to which a gradation process is performed in which the color gradually becomes dim from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight on, and when all the images are returned to the darkened image, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped by the number "2" and moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "2". It is displayed and moves slowly in the vertical direction in small steps, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued. By forming the reach, the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations ends.

Here, the reach was formed, but the reach was not formed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). When the display is stopped and the display is confirmed and the display is out of alignment, the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations ends. Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started again according to the normal change start mode. The Rukoto.

Following FIG. 68 (M), a battle effect (not shown) is started thereafter. In the battle effect, the ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and the enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. , 4th hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, if the ally character wins and the enemy character is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). , The big hit game (big hit production) is started after that. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation The variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end. Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started again according to the normal change start mode. The Rukoto.

As described above, although the variable icon 9C is normally used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display), in the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations, It is used as a notice to inform the start of the production that is about to begin over (straddling) multiple fluctuations.

Further, in the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the variation in FIG. 68 (E), the next variation is the normal variation start mode in FIG. 68 (F). In FIG. 68 (H), the variable icon 9C changes, but the reach is not formed. In contrast, in FIG. 68 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the number “7” in the change. When displayed, the next variation was started in the specific variation start mode in FIG. 68 (J), the variation icon 9C was changed in FIG. 68 (L), and the reach was further formed in FIG. 68 (K). In other words, in the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations, when the next variation is started by the normal variation start mode, it is possible to suggest the change of the variation icon 9C, and the next variation is started by the specific variation start mode. It is possible to suggest a change in the variable icon 9C and to suggest that a reach is formed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the variable icon change effect over multiple fluctuations.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations in FIG. 66, the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. , An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and as the variation, a variation effect (variation display) by a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) is provided. ) Ends (even if the change ends), the change icon 9C does not disappear and remains displayed, and the next change is the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural). When the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol) is started (when the next variation is started), the hold icon 9A moves toward the variation icon 9C and the display mode of the variation icon 9C changes. (Fluctuating icon change over multiple fluctuations FIG. 66 (E) to (J) in production A, variation icon change over multiple fluctuations FIG. 67 (E) to (J) in production B, variation icon change over multiple fluctuations. In the production C, FIGS. 68 (E) to 68 (J)) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) is completed as the variation (when the variation is completed), it is not originally present. Then, where the variable icon 9C disappears, the variable icon 9C remains displayed without disappearing, and the next variation is based on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols). Since the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started (the next fluctuation is started), the fluctuation icon 9C continues to be displayed (across) over multiple fluctuations, which is an unprecedented novelty. It is possible to provide the player with the production by. Further, when the next fluctuation is started, the hold icon 9A moves toward the fluctuation icon 9C and the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C changes (that is, over (straddles) a plurality of fluctuations). (Because the display mode of the displayed variable icon changes), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode, and the player's expectation for the variable icon 9C whose display mode has changed. Can be fueled. Therefore, the novelty can be improved by the effect of the variable icon and the change of the display mode of the variable icon.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations in FIG. 66, the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. In the first effect, in the variation icon change effect A over the plurality of variations in FIG. 66, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are both the same spherical shape and displayed with the same shape, and the plurality of variations in FIG. 67 are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C both have the same spherical shape and are displayed having the same shape in the change icon change effect B over the variable icon, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the change icon change effect C over the plurality of changes in FIG. And the variable icon 9C are both the same character A and are displayed with the same shape. According to this configuration, when the shape of the variable icon 9C and the shape of the hold icon 9A have the same shape, the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C that continues to be displayed without disappearing. Therefore, when the player sees such a display mode, he / she can give the player a feeling that it may be a suggestion for the production that is about to begin, and the player himself / herself gives the rule of production. It can contribute to the idea.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations in FIG. 66, the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. In the first effect, when the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C in FIGS. 66 (F) and (G) of FIG. 66 (F) and (G) and FIG. 66 (J) and (K) of the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations, The hold icon 9A becomes the front side of the change icon 9C and disappears just before the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C overlap, and the change icon change effect B over a plurality of changes shows FIGS. 67 (F), (G) and 67. When the hold icon 9A moves toward the change icon 9C in (J) and (K), the hold icon 9A becomes the front side of the change icon 9C and disappears just before the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C overlap, and multiple changes occur. When the hold icon 9A moves toward the change icon 9C in FIGS. 68 (F) and (G) of FIG. 68 and (J) and (K) of FIG. 68, the hold icon 9A changes to the change icon 9C. It includes the effect that the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C disappear together just before they overlap on the front side. According to this configuration, when the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C that has been displayed without disappearing, the hold icon 9A becomes the front side of the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are moved. Since they disappear together just before they overlap, the display mode of the variable icon may change at the time when the variable icon 9C that had been displayed without disappearing suddenly disappears. The timing can be set to be given to the player, and the expectation of the player for the variable icon 9C can be fueled.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations in FIG. 66, the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. In the first effect, in FIGS. 66 (F) and 66 (G) of the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of fluctuations, when the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C disappear together just before they overlap, it is a bright effect image of a specific color. A bright blue spherical variable icon 9C (specific color in (J), (K) of FIG. 66) that became a specific color after the flash of blue color (red color in (J), (K) of FIG. 66) appeared. The bright red spherical variable icon 9C) appears, and when the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C disappear together in FIGS. 67 (F) and 67 (G) of the variable icon change effect B over multiple fluctuations, A bright blue spherical variable icon 9C ((J) in FIG. 67) that became a specific color after a flash of a bright blue color (red color in (J) and (K) in FIG. 67), which is an effect image of a specific color, appeared. ), (K), a bright red spherical variable icon 9C) that has a specific color appears, and in FIGS. 68 (F) and 68 (G) of the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of fluctuations, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C When they disappear together just before they overlap, a bright blue aura that becomes a specific color appears after a flash of a bright blue color (red color in (J) and (K) of FIG. 68) that is an effect image of a specific color appears. The variable icon 9C of the character A (the variable icon 9C of the character A having a bright red aura of a specific color in (J) and (K) of FIG. 66) appears. According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C that has been displayed without disappearing suddenly disappears, a flash of a specific color, which is an effect image of a specific color, first appears, and then the variable icon 9C that has become a specific color appears. Since it appears again, the display mode of the variable icon 9C after the change can be predicted from the specific color of the flash in advance.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations in FIG. 66, the variable icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. The first effect is the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right, which are variable effects (variable display) in FIGS. 66 (E) (FIG. 66 (I)) of the variable icon change effect A over a plurality of variations. Executed when the medium decorative symbol 8C (specific decorative symbol) of the decorative symbols 8R (plural decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed at the number "3" (number "7" in FIG. 66 (G)) which is the specific symbol. , Left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R (plural), which are variable effects (variable display) in FIGS. 67 (E) (FIG. 67 (I)) of the variable icon change effect B over multiple variations. When the middle decorative symbol 8C (specific decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed at the number "3" (the number "7" in FIG. 66 (G)), which is the specific symbol, it is executed and extends over multiple fluctuations. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) that are varied (variably displayed) in FIG. 68 (E) (FIG. 68 (I)) of the variable icon change effect C. Of these, the middle decorative symbol 8C (specific decorative symbol) is executed when it is stopped and displayed at the number "3" (number "7" in FIG. 66 (G)) which is the specific symbol. According to this configuration, when the middle decorative symbol 8C (specific decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed among the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols), the type of the symbol Since the first effect may be executed depending on whether or not is a specific symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are variable effects (variable display). Is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and reach is not formed. However, there is a possibility that the first effect is executed until the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) fluctuate. It can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the production (variable display).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variation icon change effect over a plurality of variations.
[Modification 1]
In the variation icon change effect A over multiple variations in FIG. 66, the variation icon change effect B over multiple variations in FIG. 67, and the variation icon change effect C over multiple variations in FIG. 68, a game ball is inserted into the first start port 20. It was based on the ball. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the variation icon change effect A over multiple variations in FIG. 66, the variation icon change effect B over multiple variations in FIG. 67, and the variation icon change effect C over multiple variations in FIG. 68, the message image MG "change!" Is an image. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a to display the message image MG on the transparent light guide plate. By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around the transparent light guide plate, the characters (for example, "change!") Formed on the transparent light guide plate appear in bright blue or bright red due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs. It can appear. Further, even if the characters appear in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 3]
In the variation icon change effect A over multiple variations in FIG. 66, the variation icon change effect B over multiple variations in FIG. 67, and the variation icon change effect C over multiple variations in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols are numbers "1" to "numbers". It was 9 ". The decorative design has an even number "2", a number "4", a number "6", and a number "8" that is blue (a little darker blue than a bright blue), and is an odd number "1". The numbers "5" and "9" have a red color (a little darker red than the bright red), and the numbers "3" and the number "7", which are specific symbols, have a gold color (bright yellow). It may be. In this way, when the numbers "3" and the numbers "7", which are the specific symbols, are stopped and displayed in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the variation icon 9C changes due to the variation icon change effect over a plurality of variations. Although the numbers "3" and "7", which are specific symbols, are odd numbers, they are gold (bright), unlike the red numbers "1", "5", and "9" (slightly darker than bright red). By having (yellow), it is possible to emphasize a specific symbol and contribute to increasing the degree of recognition that it is a specific symbol.

[Modification example 4]
In the variation icon change effect A over multiple variations in FIG. 66, the variation icon change effect B over multiple variations in FIG. 67, and the variation icon change effect C over multiple variations in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols are numbers "1" to "numbers". It was 9 ". The decorative pattern may be provided with a character corresponding to the number. In this case, the variable icon change effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not started. In the normal variation, the variable icon change effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol composed of characters and numbers is performed, and the variable icon change effect over a plurality of variations is started. Then, a variable effect (variable display) may be performed by a decorative symbol composed of only numbers. In this way, it is possible to inform the player of the state in which the variable icon change effect over a plurality of fluctuations has been started by the display mode of the decorative symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67 and the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. 68, three hold icons 9A exist when each variation icon change effect is started. The display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order from the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad toward the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed. The display mode (wave display mode) was such that the three hold icons 9A undulate as a result of propagation. However, if four hold icons 9A are present when each variable icon change effect is started, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad is changed to the first hold display position 9Ad. By propagating the display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order toward the displayed hold icon 9A, the display mode (wave display mode) is such that the four hold icons 9A undulate. ..

[Modification 6]
In the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67 and the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. 68, three hold icons 9A exist when each variation icon change effect is started. The display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order from the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad toward the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed. The display mode (wave display mode) was such that the three hold icons 9A undulate as a result of propagation. However, when each variable icon change effect is started, each hold display position 9Ad moves in the vertical direction in order from the fourth hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position regardless of the presence or absence of the hold icon 9A. The display mode may be such that the fourth hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position are wavy (wave display mode).

[Modification 7]
In the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67 and the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. 68, three hold icons 9A exist when each variation icon change effect is started. The display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order from the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad toward the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed. The display mode (wave display mode) was such that the three hold icons 9A undulate as a result of propagation. However, the hold icon 9A does not jump upward, and each hold display position 9Ad moves in the vertical direction in order from the third hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position 9Ad. The display mode (wave display mode) in which the two hold icons 9A are wavy may be used.

[Modification 8]
In the variation icon change effect B over a plurality of variations in FIG. 67 and the variation icon change effect C over a plurality of variations in FIG. 68, three hold icons 9A exist when each variation icon change effect is started. The display mode in which the hold icon 9A jumps upward in order from the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad toward the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is displayed. The display mode (wave display mode) was such that the three hold icons 9A undulate as a result of propagation. Further, in FIGS. 67 (D) and 68 (D), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as a display mode of jumping upward (jumping) jumps upward (jumps). ) When the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode, the variable icon 9C is in a display mode in which the variable icon 9C jumps upward. However, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C do not jump upward, and the hold display position 9Ad and the change display are sequentially displayed from the third hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position 9Ad and then toward the change display position 9Cd. By setting the display mode in which the position 9Cd moves in the vertical direction, the display mode (wave display mode) in which the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are wavy may be used.

[Modification 9]
The variation icon change effect A over multiple variations in FIG. 66, the variation icon change effect B over multiple variations in FIG. 67, and the variation icon change effect C over multiple variations in FIG. 68 do not include a part of the effects described. It may be added, or other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
Even if the fluctuation ends, the fluctuation icon does not disappear and remains displayed, and when the next fluctuation is started, the hold icon moves toward the fluctuation icon and the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes. The first production is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
In the first effect, the shape of the hold icon and the shape of the variable icon are displayed having the same shape.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-3]
A game machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2.
The first effect includes an effect that when the hold icon moves toward the variable icon, the hold icon becomes a front side of the variable icon and disappears together just before the hold icon and the variable icon overlap. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-3.
In the first effect, if the hold icon and the variable icon disappear together immediately before they overlap, the variable icon having the specific color appears after the effect image of the specific color appears.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4.
The first effect is executed when a specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner.
A game machine characterized by that.

The promotion effects A to C after the symbols are aligned will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In FIGS. 69 to 71, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. In some cases.

The promotion effect after the symbols are aligned is a specific game state after a hit game state occurs before a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed on the same symbol and confirmed. It is possible to execute the promotion effect of suggesting the occurrence of (high accuracy and high base state due to "16RV planned passage jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot" shown in FIG. 9). In other words, after the hit game state occurs, the specific game state (high accuracy and high base state by "16RV planned passage jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 or "16R (substantially 15R) V planned passage jackpot" shown in FIG. 9). However, a specific gaming state does not occur (a high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability variation state) occurs due to the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9). A symbol (for example, the same even-numbered symbol) is derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to temporarily discourage the player, and a plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol). Even if it is not (in a state where multiple decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even number symbol)), a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state can be executed. It is a thing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a promotion effect after the symbols are aligned, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Examples of various background images for the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern include ordinary background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned will be described in order.

[Promotion production A after matching the patterns]
The promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned. The promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned is a specific game state after a hit game state occurs before a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed on the same symbol and confirmed. It is possible to carry out a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of. In other words, in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned, the same symbol (here, the same even number) that conveys that the specific game state does not occur although the specific game state occurs after the hit game state occurs. The symbol) is derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) to discourage the player once, and before the plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even number symbol) (multiple decorations). It is possible to execute a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state when the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even symbol).

First, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It has become. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and only one is in stock. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a so that the visibility is not hindered by other images. It has become. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the visibility is improved by other images. Since it is not hindered, it can always be visually recognized even in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the icon of the character A having a white aura and the hit expectation of the icon of the character B having a white aura are the same as the hit expectation of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich). Is set high.

In FIG. 69A, a normal background image THG1 (here, a forest image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and a variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, it has already been determined that after the hit game state has occurred, the high-accuracy high-base state due to the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is the specific game state, will occur. However, the same symbol (here) that conveys that a specific gaming state does not occur (a high-probability low-base state (latent probability-changing state) occurs due to the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9). Then, in order to derive and display the same number "2") by the variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player once, the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned has been started.

The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. , The right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and it becomes a display mode that moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (here, the number "2"). And reach is formed. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the battle effect is started. The background image of the battle effect is the battle-dedicated background image THG2, which is not included in the normal background image THG1. When the battle effect is started, the background image is switched from the normal background image THG1 to the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the display screen. At the center of 7a, a production in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is unfolded. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. , 4th hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and then hit. The hit game (hit production) is started. When the hit is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) at the same timing. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation The variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end.

When the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting due to the battle effect, the ally character CRA moves to the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69 (D). As shown, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG of "press!" Prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is above the button image BG. Is displayed in. This message image MG has a higher degree of expectation in the order of "press!" → "continuous hit!" → "long press!". An arrow image pointing downward between the button image BG and the message image MG is also displayed on the display screen 7a, and the arrow image repeatedly reciprocates in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image also gives the player an effect button. It is possible to prompt the pressing operation of 63 (the operation of pressing the pressing operation unit of the effect button 63 downward). The button image BG, the message image MG, and the arrow image are designed to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or the player does not press the effect button 63. In some cases, the display screen 7a disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the first premier background image THG3 having seven colors as the background image (so-called "" The first rainbow background image THG3 ”) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as an image. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the device 7, the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. , Stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the winning is confirmed.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), a dedicated victory background image THG4 that conveys the victory of the ally character CRA as a background image appears. Suddenly, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier image THG3, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB appears (displays) in the center of the display screen 7a, from the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. A specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC is displayed in. A part of the left side of the character CRC is arranged and displayed so as to cover a part of the right side of the indicator image TB.

The indicator image TB constituting the specific image visually and intuitively displays the remaining time by shortening the length of the horizontal bar image. In the present embodiment, the maximum remaining time is 15 seconds. That is, the state in which the length of the bar image is displayed for the longest time (the state shown in FIG. 69 (F)) is the maximum remaining time (15 seconds), and the specific image (indicator image TB) is displayed. When the countdown is started (timekeeping starts), the length of the bar image is shortened from right to left. The color of the bar image of the indicator image has a bright color tone when the remaining time is the maximum (15 seconds), a dark color tone when the remaining time is the minimum (zero seconds), and the remaining time is the maximum (15 seconds). It is a display mode (display mode by gradation) in which the color tone changes gradually (or continuously) from to the minimum (zero seconds). When the color of the bar image of the indicator image is changed stepwise, the display mode is such that the color tone changes darkly every second (display mode by gradation). Further, when the color of the bar image of the indicator image is continuously changed, the color tone is dark and smoothly changed (display mode by gradation).

The character CRC that constitutes the specific image is the character B that may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC constituting the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the enemy character CRB becomes smaller so as to move away in the depth direction, and a flash EXG is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. .. At this time, the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image are displayed, and the display mode in which the length of the bar image of the indicator image TB becomes shorter from right to left is continued, and the countdown is performed. (Timekeeping) is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), a dedicated hit background image THG5 that conveys a hit as a background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the victory background image THG4, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , Right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). Here, after the hit game state occurs, the high accuracy and high base state due to the "16 RV passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is the specific game state, is supposed to occur, but the specific game state is intentionally generated. The same even number "2" that conveys the fact that it is not used is derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to temporarily discourage the player.

At this time, the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image are displayed, and the display mode in which the length of the bar image of the indicator image TB becomes shorter from right to left is continued, and the countdown is performed. (Timekeeping) is continuing. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), the "16R (substantially)" shown in FIG. 9 is displayed. 13R) V-passing jackpot ”will occur. When the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is confirmed, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the hit game (hit effect), and the high accuracy and low base state (latent probability change state) ) May be. That is, the game state after the hit game (hit effect) is not the high accuracy high base state which is the specific game state but the high accuracy low base state (100 times in this case) when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. It may be in a latent probability change state).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are obtained until the remaining time is minimized (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image. Is maintained in the state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). Of course, the character CRC that constitutes the specific image is also displayed.

Based on the fact that the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image minimizes the remaining time (zero seconds) (in other words, the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image minimizes the remaining time (zero seconds). ), And after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) has passed for the purpose of distracting the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 69 (J), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation. Suddenly switches from the hit background image THG5 and is displayed on the display screen 7a, the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol that have been temporarily stopped are displayed. 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 from the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Forward), the image advances (moves) again toward the center position (advancement position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds).

When a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 69 (K), the first premier image is used as the background image. The second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from (first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the promotion background image THG6, and the left decoration. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), and the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned ends. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it is shown in FIG. 9 which is a specific game state. Also, a "16RV passing jackpot" will occur. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premier background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the hit is confirmed, like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, the promoted pattern (here, the number "7") can be emphasized.

When the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed again, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Further, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed and the hit game (hit effect) is started and ended, the game state after the hit game (hit effect) becomes the high accuracy and high base state which is the specific game state.

[Promotion production B after matching the patterns]
The promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned. The promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned is a specific game state after a hit game state occurs before a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed on the same symbol and confirmed. It is possible to carry out a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of. In other words, in the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned, the same symbol (here, the same even number) that conveys that the specific game state does not occur although the specific game state occurs after the hit game state occurs. The symbol) is derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) to discourage the player once, and before the plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even number symbol) (multiple decorations). It is possible to execute a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state when the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even symbol).

First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It has become. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and only one is in stock. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a so that the visibility is not hindered by other images. It has become. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or when the decoration pattern variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the visibility is improved by other images. Since it is not hindered, it can always be visually recognized even in the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the icon of the character A having a white aura and the hit expectation of the icon of the character B having a white aura are the same as the hit expectation of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich). Is set high.

In FIG. 70A, a normal background image THG1 (here, a forest image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and a variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, it has already been determined that after the hit game state has occurred, the high-accuracy high-base state due to the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is the specific game state, will occur. However, the same symbol (here) that conveys that a specific gaming state does not occur (a high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability variation state) occurs due to the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9). Then, in order to derive and display the same number "2") by the variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player once, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned has been started.

The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. , The right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and it becomes a display mode that moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (here, the number "2"). And reach is formed. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the battle effect is started. The background image of the battle effect is the battle-dedicated background image THG2, which is not included in the normal background image THG1. When the battle effect is started, the background image is switched from the normal background image THG1 to the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the display screen. At the center of 7a, a production in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is unfolded. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. , 4th hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and then hit. The hit game (hit production) is started. When the hit is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) at the same timing. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation The variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end.

When the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting due to the battle effect, the ally character CRA moves to the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70 (D). As shown, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG of "continuous hitting!" Prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is above the button image BG. Is displayed in. This message image MG has a higher degree of expectation in the order of "press!" → "continuous hit!" → "long press!". An arrow image pointing downward between the button image BG and the message image MG is also displayed on the display screen 7a, and the arrow image repeatedly reciprocates in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image also gives the player an effect button. It is possible to prompt the pressing operation of 63 (the operation of pressing the pressing operation unit of the effect button 63 downward). The button image BG, the message image MG, and the arrow image are designed to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or the player does not press the effect button 63. In some cases, the display screen 7a disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the first premier background image THG3 having seven colors as the background image (so-called "" The first rainbow background image THG3 ”) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as an image. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the device 7, the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. , Stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the winning is confirmed.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), a dedicated victory background image THG4 that conveys the victory of the ally character CRA as a background image appears. Suddenly, the display screen 7a is displayed by switching from the first rainbow background image THG3 which is the first premier image THG3, and the enemy character CRB appears (displays) in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. , A specific image composed of a character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin is displayed.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image starts from the lower right corner of the display screen 7a and counterclockwise toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a along the lower edge of the display screen 7a. When it rolls to the left side, it rolls counterclockwise toward the upper left corner of the display screen 7a along the left side, and when it reaches the upper side, it goes along the upper side to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. When it rolls counterclockwise toward the right side and reaches the right side, it rolls counterclockwise toward the starting point, which is the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the lower side, it rolls. Stop moving. That is, the character CRC attached to the surface (front surface) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls around the display screen 7a and goes around.

This embodiment is defined as the time (hereinafter, referred to as "rolling time") in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front surface) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and goes around. Then, it is 15 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image starts rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a, the countdown will start (timekeeping will start). , The position where the coin is displayed indicates the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image is the character B that may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the enemy character CRB becomes smaller so as to move away in the depth direction, and a flash EXG is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. .. At this time, the display mode in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front surface) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a is continued, and the countdown (timekeeping) is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), a dedicated hit background image THG5 that conveys a hit as a background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the victory background image THG4, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). Here, after the hit game state occurs, the high accuracy and high base state due to the "16 RV passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is the specific game state, is supposed to occur, but the specific game state is intentionally generated. The same even number "2" that conveys the fact that it is not used is derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to temporarily discourage the player.

At this time, the display mode in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a is continued, and the countdown (timekeeping) is continued. Has been done. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), the "16R (substantially)" shown in FIG. 9 is displayed. 13R) V-passing jackpot ”will occur. When the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is confirmed, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the hit game (hit effect), and the high accuracy and low base state (latent probability change state) ) May be. That is, the game state after the hit game (hit effect) is not the high accuracy high base state which is the specific game state but the high accuracy low base state (100 times in this case) when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. It may be in a latent probability change state).

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), the time (rolling time) in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and goes around. ) Is the minimum remaining (zero seconds), in other words, until the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and completes one round. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are maintained in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2").

Based on the fact that the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coins that make up the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and finishes making a round (in other words, the coins that make up the specific image). The character CRC attached to the front surface (front) rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a to complete a round, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) is used for the purpose of distracting the display of the final promotion result. After a lapse of time), as shown in FIG. 70 (J), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the hit background image THG5, and the surface of the coin constituting the specific image ( The character CRC attached to the front) disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that were temporarily stopped are also disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the first movable accessory 14 Is the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and advances toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a from the stationary state at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7. (Move), and reciprocate in small steps repeatedly in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds).

When a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed and the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 70 (K), the first premier image is used as the background image. The second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from (first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the promotion background image THG6, and the left decoration. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), and the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned ends. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it is shown in FIG. 9 which is a specific game state. Also, a "16RV passing jackpot" will occur. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premier background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the hit is confirmed, like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, the promoted pattern (here, the number "7") can be emphasized.

When the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed again, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Further, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed and the hit game (hit effect) is started and ended, the game state after the hit game (hit effect) becomes the high accuracy and high base state which is the specific game state.

[Promotion production C after matching the patterns]
The promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned. The promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned is a specific game state after a hit game state occurs before a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed on the same symbol and confirmed. It is possible to carry out a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of. In other words, in the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned, the same symbol (here, the same even number) that conveys that the specific game state does not occur although the specific game state occurs after the hit game state occurs. The symbol) is derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) to discourage the player once, and before the plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even number symbol) (multiple decorations). It is possible to execute a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state when the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even symbol).

First, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It has become. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and only one is in stock. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a so that the visibility is not hindered by other images. It has become. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or when the decoration pattern variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the visibility is improved by other images. Since it is not hindered, it can always be visually recognized even in the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the icon of the character A having a white aura and the hit expectation of the icon of the character B having a white aura are the same as the hit expectation of the white spherical icon. However, the icon of character A and the icon of character B are expected to be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich). Is set high.

In FIG. 71 (A), the normal background image THG1 (here, the forest image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, it has already been determined that after the hit game state has occurred, the high-accuracy high-base state due to the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is the specific game state, will occur. However, the same symbol (here) that conveys that a specific gaming state does not occur (a high-probability low-base state (latent probability-changing state) occurs due to the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9). Then, in order to derive and display the same number "2") by the variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player once, the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned has been started.

The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. , The right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and it becomes a display mode that moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (here, the number "2"). And reach is formed. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the battle effect is started. The background image of the battle effect is the battle-dedicated background image THG2, which is not included in the normal background image THG1. When the battle effect is started, the background image is switched from the normal background image THG1 to the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the display screen. At the center of 7a, a production in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is unfolded. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. , 4th hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and then hit. The hit game (hit production) is started. When the hit is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) at the same timing. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation The variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end.

When the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting due to the battle effect, the ally character CRA moves to the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71 (D). As shown, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG of "long press!" Prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is the button image BG. Displayed above. This message image MG has a higher degree of expectation in the order of "press!" → "continuous hit!" → "long press!". An arrow image pointing downward between the button image BG and the message image MG is also displayed on the display screen 7a, and the arrow image repeatedly reciprocates in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image also gives the player an effect button. It is possible to prompt the pressing operation of 63 (the operation of pressing the pressing operation unit of the effect button 63 downward). The button image BG, the message image MG, and the arrow image are designed to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or the player does not press the effect button 63. In some cases, the display screen 7a disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the first premier background image THG3 having seven colors as the background image (so-called "" The first rainbow background image THG3 ”) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as an image. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the device 7, the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. , Stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the winning is confirmed.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), a dedicated victory background image THG4 that conveys the victory of the ally character CRA as a background image appears. Suddenly, the display screen 7a is displayed by switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier image THG3, and the enemy character CRB appears (displays) in the center of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. , A specific image composed of a character CRC attached to the surface (front surface) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC is displayed. Specifically, the character CRC is attached to the entire surface (front) of the coin, and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC below the surface (front) of the coin.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image is a vertical line passing through the highest point and the lowest point of the coin (hereinafter, simply referred to as "vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image"). The point where the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the coin (hereinafter, simply referred to as "the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image") intersects is the center point (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "center point"). .).

The countdown image NJ displays a numerical image that is counted down (counted) in a circular shape, and is a vertical line passing through the highest point and the lowest point of the circular shape (hereinafter, simply "countdown constituting a specific image"). The vertical line of the image NJ ”) and the vertical line of the coins that make up the specific image match. The countdown image NJ is a horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circular shape (hereinafter, simply referred to as "the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image") and the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image. And are parallel, and the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circular shape is located below the horizontal line of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image is designed to rotate counterclockwise or clockwise around the center point, and such rotation is repeated. The display mode is such that the character CRC also swings in conjunction with the swing of the coin. On the other hand, although the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC is arranged on the surface (front) of the coin, unlike the character CRC, it is linked to the swing of the coin. When the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image moves to the left of the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image. When the coin moves in parallel and rotates clockwise around the center point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image moves in parallel to the right of the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image.

Even if the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that composes the specific image moves in parallel to the left or right of the vertical line of the coin that composes the specific image, the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ that composes the specific image and the specific image are configured. The distance dimension between the horizontal line of the coin and the image is not changed. That is, the countdown image NJ that constitutes a specific image simply moves horizontally to the left when the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, and simply moves to the right when the coin rotates clockwise around the center point. It is designed to move horizontally to.

The number image displayed in the circular shape in the countdown image NJ is a number image that is counted down (timed), and is 15 seconds in the present embodiment. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image and the countdown image NJ are displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown will be started (timekeeping will be started). , Countdown image The remaining time is represented by a numerical image that is counted down (timed) by the NJ.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image is the character B that may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), the enemy character CRB becomes smaller so as to move away in the depth direction, and a flash EXG is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. .. At this time, the display mode in which the character CRC also swings in conjunction with the swing of the coins constituting the specific image is continued, and the display mode in which the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image also moves horizontally to the left and right is continued, and this countdown The countdown (counting) by the numerical image of the image NJ is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), a dedicated hit background image THG5 that conveys a hit as a background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the victory background image THG4, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. , The right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"). Here, after the hit game state occurs, the high accuracy and high base state due to the "16 RV passing planned jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is the specific game state, is supposed to occur, but the specific game state is intentionally generated. The same even number "2" that conveys the fact that it is not used is derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to temporarily discourage the player.

At this time, the display mode in which the character CRC also swings in conjunction with the swing of the coins constituting the specific image is continued, and the display mode in which the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image also moves horizontally to the left and right is continued, and this countdown The countdown (counting) by the numerical image of the image NJ is continued. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), the "16R (substantially)" shown in FIG. 9 is displayed. 13R) V-passing jackpot ”will occur. When the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is confirmed, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the hit game (hit effect), and the high accuracy and low base state (latent probability change state) ) May be. That is, the game state after the hit game (hit effect) is not the high accuracy high base state which is the specific game state but the high accuracy low base state (100 times in this case) when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. It may be in a latent probability change state).

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol are used until the number image counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image reaches zero seconds. The state in which 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2") is maintained.

A number image that is counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ that composes a specific image Based on the fact that the number image is zero seconds (in other words, a number image that is counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ that constitutes a specific image). Is zero seconds, and after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed for the purpose of distracting the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 71 (J), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation. Suddenly switches from the hit background image THG5 and is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character CRC and the countdown image NJ attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a and are temporarily stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7. From the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image is advanced (moved) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and the center position (advance) is set for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). Position), it repeatedly moves back and forth in small steps in the left-right direction.

When a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed and the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 71 (K), the first premier image is used as the background image. The second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from (first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the promotion background image THG6, and the left decoration. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned ends. If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it is shown in FIG. 9 which is a specific game state. Also, a "16RV passing jackpot" will occur. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premier background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the hit is confirmed, like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, the promoted pattern (here, the number "7") can be emphasized.

When the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed again, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Further, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed and the hit game (hit effect) is started and ended, the game state after the hit game (hit effect) becomes the high accuracy and high base state which is the specific game state.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the promotion effect after the symbols are aligned.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, a plurality of types of images are displayed. An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying is provided, and a winning game state is provided before the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol. The first effect of displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state after the occurrence of the above (the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned is composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC in FIGS. 69 (F) to (I). In the specific image to be performed and the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned, in FIGS. 70 (F) to (I), the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin, and in the specific image and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned. In FIGS. 71 (F) to 71 (I), the character CRC is attached to the surface (front surface) of the coin, and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC). Can be done. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are not confirmed and displayed on the same symbol, the specific game is performed after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image suggesting the occurrence of the state is displayed, as a result of tentatively displaying a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by the variation effect (variation display) on the same symbol, the specific game state. When is not generated, a specific image is displayed even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not fixedly displayed on the same symbol (that is, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol). Therefore, it is possible to execute a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the first effect in the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, It is performed after the second production of displaying the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3 suggesting a hit in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69 (E), and is performed in FIG. 70 (E). Promotion effect after pattern alignment B is performed after the second effect of displaying the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, and the promotion effect after symbol alignment in FIG. 71 (E). It is performed after the second effect of displaying the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3 suggesting a hit in C. According to this configuration, the player is given a sense of security by suggesting that the second effect is a hit, and further, the promotion effect by the first effect after the second effect gives the player a specific gaming state. It can fuel the expectation for the outbreak.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the first effect in the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, A state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are aligned and displayed in the same symbol in FIGS. 69 (H) and 69 (I) of the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned. In, the display of the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC can be continued, and in FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (I) of the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are displayed. Even when 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol, the display of a specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin is continued. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol in FIGS. 71 (H) and 71 (I) of the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned. Even in this state, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC so that the display of the specific image configured can be continued. It has become. According to this configuration, the display of the specific image is continued even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol. , It is possible to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols may change to another display mode, and to arouse the expectation of the player for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols. Can be done.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the first effect in the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, In FIG. 69 (J) of the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned, the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right are displayed in the same symbol. When the decorative symbols 8R (plural decorative symbols) disappear, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, and the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) returns to the retracted position. When returning, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed together with the same specific symbol number "7" to convey the occurrence of the specific gaming state. The left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the same pattern as the specific image configured by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin in FIG. 70 (J) of the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) disappear, the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, and the first movable accessory 14 (the first movable accessory 14) When the movable body) returns to the retracted position, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in the same specific symbol number "7". It is possible to convey the occurrence of a specific game state, and in FIG. 71 (J) of promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned, a character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image is applied so as to cover a part of the character CRC. When the specific image composed by arranging the NJs and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) displayed in the same symbol disappear, the first When the movable accessory 14 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position and the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) returns to the retracted position again, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol are returned. The 8Rs (plurality of decorative symbols) are aligned with the number "7", which is the same specific symbol, and are fixedly displayed so that the occurrence of the specific gaming state can be notified. According to this configuration, when the specific image and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) displayed in the same pattern disappear, the movable body is suddenly moved. Is designed to move from the retracted position to the advanced position and appear, so it can be produced with an impact by the movable body, and when the movable body returns to the retracted position again, a specific gaming state occurs. Since all of the multiple decorative symbols are aligned and displayed on the number "7", which is the specific symbol to be transmitted, the player is informed of the success of the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable body (confirmation of the occurrence of the specific gaming state). Can be emphasized and conveyed.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the specific images in the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned, the specific images composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC in FIGS. 69 (F) to (I) are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural). It is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative symbol) is confirmed and displayed on the same symbol, and in the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned, the surface of the coin is shown in FIGS. 70 (F) to 70 (I). The specific image composed of the character CRC attached to (front) is the rest until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol. It is an image that conveys the time (approximate remaining time), and in the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. 71 (F) to 71 (I) and a part of the character CRC. The specific image composed by arranging the countdown image NJ so as to cover the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol. It is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time). According to this configuration, the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until a plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol. In other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until the promotion effect (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), the time when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) is suitable. Can be displayed on.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the promotion effect after the symbols are aligned.
[Modification 1]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable body is successful (the occurrence of the specific game state is confirmed). ), The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in the same symbol of the number "7", and the occurrence of the specific gaming state is notified to the player. Was there. However, the promotion effect may fail (the specific game state does not occur) due to the appearance of the movable body. In this way, it is possible to give variation to the promotion effect after the symbols are aligned.

[Modification 3]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state is displayed on the image display device 7 ( Displayed on the display screen 7a), the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol is transmitted. Was there. At this time, the remaining time (approximate time) may be set to flow from the speaker 67, for example, the voice "remaining 5 seconds". By doing so, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) can be transmitted to the player by the specific image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the sound flowing from the speaker 67, and the remaining time can be transmitted. (Approximate remaining time) can be easily grasped.

[Modification example 4]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state is displayed on the image display device 7 ( Displayed on the display screen 7a), the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol is transmitted. Was there. However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a to display a specific image on the transparent light guide plate. In this case, since the number of images that can be displayed on the light guide plate is also limited, the light guide plate does not convey the remaining time (approximate remaining time) every second, for example, "15 seconds remaining", ""5 seconds remaining" and "0 seconds remaining" are displayed. By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around the transparent light guide plate, the color is changed each time the remaining time (approximate remaining time) is shortened by the light emission of the full-color LEDs, for example, "15 seconds remaining" is brightened. It may be displayed in white, "5 seconds remaining" may be displayed in bright blue, and "0 seconds remaining" may be displayed in red. Even if the remaining time (approximate remaining time) appears in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 5]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, the same symbols (same even numbers) indicating that the specific gaming state does not occur The symbol) was derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player once, and a promotion effect was executed to suggest the occurrence of a specific gaming state. However, there may be cases where the promotion effect is not executed. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the promotion effect may be executed, and it is also possible to increase the variation of the effect after the derived display by the variable effect (variable display).

[Modification 6]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, the same symbols (same even numbers) indicating that the specific gaming state does not occur The symbol) was derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player once, and a promotion effect was executed to suggest the occurrence of a specific gaming state. The specific game state was "16RV scheduled passage jackpot" shown in FIG. However, as the specific gaming state, the "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 may be used instead of the "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" shown in FIG. Even with this configuration, in the same way as the "16RV passing jackpot", in the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", the gaming state after the hit game (hit production) becomes a highly accurate and high base state. ..

[Modification 7]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, the same symbols (same even numbers) indicating that the specific gaming state does not occur The symbol) was derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player once, and a promotion effect was executed to suggest the occurrence of a specific gaming state. However, the same symbol (number "7" (may be number "3")) that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state is derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to suggest the occurrence of a specific gaming state. You may try to perform the production.

[Modification 8]
In the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, FIGS. 69 (H), (I) of the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned. ), Even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol, the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC. The display is continued until the remaining time becomes the minimum (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB, and in FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (I) of the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C , And the display of the specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin even when the right decorative symbols 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol, the specific image ( The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and continues until the time (rolling time) to go around is the minimum (zero seconds) remaining, and the symbols are aligned. Even in the state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol in FIGS. 71 (H) and 71 (I) of the later promotion effect C. A number that is counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ to display a specific image composed of a character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC. It continued until the image reached zero seconds. However, the display of the specific image may be terminated before the time reaches zero seconds (arbitrary time from timekeeping to zero seconds). In this case, the dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the hit background image THG5, the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which has been temporarily stopped, is displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the display screen of the image display device 7 is further changed from the state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) again toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). In this way, before the time reaches zero seconds (arbitrary time from timekeeping to zero seconds), the second movable accessory 15 suddenly advances, and the occurrence of the promotion effect is regarded as an impactful effect. Can be emphasized. The sub-control board 90 is determined for an arbitrary time from timekeeping to zero seconds.

[Modification 9]
The character CRC of the specific image in the promotion effect A after the symbol alignment in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbol alignment in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbol alignment in FIG. 71 appears as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. It was a character B in some cases. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC of the specific image. However, the character CRC of the specific image may be a promotion effect character that appears only in the promotion effects A to C after the symbols are aligned, or the premier characters that appear when the so-called premier image is displayed are aligned with the symbols. It may also appear in the later promotion effects A to C. In either case, since the character is rarely seen, it can contribute to further enhancing the effect of the promotion effects A to C after the symbols are aligned.

[Modification 10]
The promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71 may not include a part of the described effects, and others. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
Before a plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol, it is possible to execute the first effect of displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state after the hit gaming state has occurred.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
The first effect is performed after the second effect of displaying an image suggesting a hit.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A7-1 or the aspect A7-2.
In the first effect, the display of the specific image can be continued even when the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed together in the same symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3.
Equipped with a movable body that moves between the retracted position and the advanced position,
In the first effect, when the specific image and the plurality of decorative symbols displayed aligned with the same symbol disappear, the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, and the movable body moves. When the body returns to the retracted position again, the plurality of decorative symbols are aligned with the same specific symbol and displayed in a definite manner to notify the occurrence of the specific gaming state.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-4.
The specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time until the plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

The reserved symbol effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. This reserved symbol effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold symbol effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Holding symbol production A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the reserved symbol effect A.
The hold symbol effect A is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C after the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are stopped.

First, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. Here, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the target hold TH that is the target of the hold change. At this point, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are assumed to be white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the hold symbol stop effect is executed. The hold symbol stop effect is executed after the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are stopped. In the stop effect of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, first, the fluctuation speed of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow and the variation of the left effect symbol 8L becomes visible, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Next, the right effect symbol 8R stops after the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow and the variation of the right effect symbol 8R becomes visible. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at "1" and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at "2".

The hold symbol stop effect is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ imitating the hold icon 9A (the variable icon 9C) is stopped following the stop of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. This reserved symbol HZ is a symbol that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a hit in the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved symbol HZ is a circular symbol that imitates the reserved icon 9A (the variable icon 9C), and is red, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the variation corresponding to the target reserved TH will be a hit. It has become. In the hold symbol stop effect, for example, the fluctuation speed of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and after the fluctuation of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes visible, the hold symbol HZ that is mixed with the middle effect symbol 8C stops. And so on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the reserved symbol enlargement effect is executed. The hold symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the size of the stopped symbol HZ is increased. Here, it is shown that the red reserved symbol HZ in a circular shape is enlarged. The reserved symbol HZ is enlarged to the extent that it does not overlap the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, but it may be enlarged until it overlaps the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Further, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the reserved symbol reduction effect is executed. The hold symbol reduction effect is an effect in which the size of the enlarged hold symbol HZ is reduced and the hold symbol HZ moves away from the target hold TH (hold icon 9A). Here, as indicated by the arrow K1, the reserved image HZ moves to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. At this time as well, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the reserved symbol movement effect is executed. The hold symbol movement effect is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ moves to the target hold TH. Here, the hold image HZ moved to the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a moves to the target hold TH in a parabolic manner as shown by the arrow K2. Of course, you may move to draw a straight line. At this time, the reserved symbol HZ may be moved at a constant speed, or may be moved so as to gradually increase in speed (for example, as if a constant acceleration is acting). If you do the latter, it will be a powerful movement effect. At this time as well, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the reserved symbol collision effect is executed. The reserved symbol collision effect is an effect of displaying an image indicating that the reserved symbol HZ has collided with the target reserved TH. Here, a radial image centered on the target hold TH is displayed. It should be noted that a moving image may be displayed instead of a still image. For example, a moving image in which particles are scattered radially or a moving image of an explosion in which smoke is ejected may be adopted. In this way, the production of the pending change becomes novel, and the expectation for the pending change increases. At this time as well, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), the hold change effect is executed. The hold change effect is an effect in which the target hold TH changes its mode. Here, the display color of the target hold TH is changed to the same red color as the hold symbol HZ. Here, the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C is performed again. At this time, when the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are hidden or translucent, it is conceivable to restore the display mode of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2". Further, at the same time as the confirmation stop display, the change icon 9C is hidden.

[Holding symbol production B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the reserved symbol effect B.
The hold symbol effect B is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C after the reach formation effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 73A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. Here, the variable icon 9C is the target hold TH that is the target of the hold change. It is assumed that the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73B, the hold symbol stop effect is executed. The hold symbol stop effect is executed after the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are stopped. In the stop effect of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, first, the fluctuation speed of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow and the variation of the left effect symbol 8L becomes visible, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Next, the right effect symbol 8R stops after the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow and the variation of the right effect symbol 8R becomes visible. Here, it is shown that the left and right production symbols 8L and 8R are "7" to form a reach.

The hold symbol stop effect is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ imitating the hold icon 9A (the variable icon 9C) is stopped following the stop of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. This reserved symbol HZ is a symbol that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a hit in the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved symbol HZ is a circular symbol that imitates the reserved icon 9A (the variable icon 9C), and is red, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the variation corresponding to the target reserved TH will be a hit. It has become. In the hold symbol stop effect, for example, the fluctuation speed of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and after the fluctuation of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes visible, the hold symbol HZ that is mixed with the middle effect symbol 8C stops. And so on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73C, the reserved symbol enlargement effect is executed. The hold symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the size of the stopped symbol HZ is increased. Here, it is shown that the red reserved symbol HZ in a circular shape is enlarged. The reserved symbol HZ is enlarged to the extent that it does not overlap the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, but it may be enlarged until it overlaps the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Further, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the reserved symbol reduction effect is executed. The reserved symbol reduction effect is an effect in which the size of the enlarged reserved symbol HZ is reduced and the reserved symbol HZ moves away from the target reserved TH (the variable icon 9C). Here, as indicated by the arrow K1, the reserved image HZ moves to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. At this time as well, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), the reserved symbol movement effect is executed. The hold symbol movement effect is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ moves to the target hold TH. Here, the hold image HZ moved to the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a moves to the target hold TH in a parabolic manner as shown by the arrow K2. Of course, you may move to draw a straight line. At this time, the reserved symbol HZ may be moved at a constant speed, or may be moved so as to gradually increase in speed (for example, as if a constant acceleration is acting). If you do the latter, it will be a powerful movement effect. At this time as well, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the reserved symbol collision effect is executed. The reserved symbol collision effect is an effect of displaying an image indicating that the reserved symbol HZ has collided with the target reserved TH. Here, a radial image centered on the target hold TH is displayed. It should be noted that a moving image may be displayed instead of a still image. For example, a moving image in which particles are scattered radially or a moving image of an explosion in which smoke is ejected may be adopted. In this way, the production of the pending change becomes novel, and the expectation for the pending change increases. At this time as well, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the hold change effect is executed. The hold change effect is an effect in which the target hold TH changes its mode. Here, the display color of the target hold TH is changed to the same red color as the hold symbol HZ. Here, the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C is performed again. At this time, when the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are hidden or translucent, it is conceivable to restore the display mode of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7", which are doublets. Further, at the same time as the confirmation stop display, the change icon 9C is hidden.

[Holding symbol production C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the reserved symbol effect C.
The reserved symbol effect C is an effect in which the reserved symbol HZ stops in place of the right effect symbol 8R after the left effect symbol 8L is stopped.

First, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. Here, the variable icon 9C is the target hold TH that is the target of the hold change. It is assumed that the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the hold symbol stop effect is executed. The hold symbol stop effect is executed after the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. The left effect symbol 8L stops after the fluctuation speed becomes slow and the fluctuation becomes visible. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at "7".

The hold symbol stop effect is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ imitating the hold icon 9A (the variable icon 9C) is stopped following the stop of the left effect symbol 8L. This reserved symbol HZ is a symbol that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a hit in the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved symbol HZ is a circular symbol that imitates the reserved icon 9A (the variable icon 9C), and includes a character image of "super heat". In the hold symbol stop effect, for example, the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and after the fluctuation of the right effect symbol 8R becomes visible, the hold symbol HZ that is mixed with the right effect symbol 8R stops. And so on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the reserved symbol enlargement effect is executed. The hold symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the size of the stopped symbol HZ is increased. Here, it is shown that the reserved symbol HZ including the character image of "super hot" in a circular shape is enlarged. The left effect symbol 8L may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the reserved symbol reduction effect is executed. The reserved symbol reduction effect is an effect in which the size of the enlarged reserved symbol HZ is reduced and the reserved symbol HZ moves away from the target reserved TH (the variable icon 9C). Here, as indicated by the arrow K1, the reserved image HZ moves to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. At this time as well, the left effect symbol 8L may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), the reserved symbol movement effect is executed. The hold symbol movement effect is an effect in which the hold symbol HZ moves to the target hold TH. Here, the hold image HZ moved to the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a moves to the target hold TH in a parabolic manner as shown by the arrow K2. Of course, you may move to draw a straight line. At this time, the reserved symbol HZ may be moved at a constant speed, or may be moved so as to gradually increase in speed (for example, as if a constant acceleration is acting). If you do the latter, it will be a powerful movement effect. At this time as well, the left effect symbol 8L may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the reserved symbol collision effect is executed. The reserved symbol collision effect is an effect of displaying an image indicating that the reserved symbol HZ has collided with the target reserved TH. Here, a radial image centered on the target hold TH is displayed. It should be noted that a moving image may be displayed instead of a still image. For example, a moving image in which particles are scattered radially or a moving image of an explosion in which smoke is ejected may be adopted. In this way, the production of the pending change becomes novel, and the expectation for the pending change increases. At this time as well, the left effect symbol 8L may be hidden or translucent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention only to the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the hold change effect is executed. The hold change effect is an effect in which the target hold TH changes its mode. Here, the display color of the target hold TH is changed to red according to the character string "super hot" of the hold symbol HZ. Here, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R is performed again. At this time, when the left effect symbol 8L is hidden or translucent, it is conceivable to restore the display mode of the left effect symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are stopped in a specific mode. Here, the left and right production symbols 8L and 8R are both "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the reserved symbol effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved symbol HZ is stopped in place of the middle effect symbol 8C or the right effect symbol 8R (FIGS. 72 (B), 73 (B), 74 (B), "design". "Stop effect"), the stopped symbol HZ is moved to the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C (target hold TH) (FIGS. 72 (E), 73 (E), 74 (E), "Movement display effect"), the mode of the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is changed to a mode according to the transition expectation degree suggested by the hold symbol HZ (FIGS. 72 (G), 73 (G), FIG. 74 (G), “holding mode change effect”). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the effect related to the mode change of the hold image (hold icon and the change icon) novel, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stopped symbol HZ is moved to the target hold TH after being enlarged (FIGS. 72 (C), 73 (C), 74 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player in the production related to the mode change of the reserved image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the enlarged reserved symbol HZ is reduced and moved in a direction away from the target reserved TH (FIGS. 72 (D), 73 (D), 74 (D)). , Moved to target hold TH. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player in the production related to the mode change of the reserved image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved symbol HZ is moved from the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the target reserved TH so as to draw a curved locus (FIGS. 72 (E), 73 (E), 74). (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player in the production related to the mode change of the reserved image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the reserved symbol HZ reaches the target reserved TH, a radial image showing a collision is displayed (FIGS. 72 (F), 73 (F), 74 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give surprises and expectations to the player in the production related to the mode change of the reserved image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved symbol HZ can be stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol after the reach formation effect (FIG. 73 (B)). According to this configuration, the mode of the target hold TH (for example, the variable icon 9C) is changed after the reach is formed, the player can be surprised and expected, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the reserved symbol effect.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved symbol effects A and B, the display color of the reserved symbol HZ was red, and the display color of the target reserved TH also changed from white to red. On the other hand, it is conceivable that the display color of the reserved symbol is provided according to the degree of expectation, such as blue, green, purple, red, and gold. Here, it is conceivable that the higher the degree of expectation, the closer to gold.
In the above, when the display color of the reserved symbol is "red", the display color of the target hold is also changed to "red", but when the display color of the reserved symbol is "red", the display color of the target hold is also changed. May be changed to another color. That is, the display color of the reserved symbol and the display color of the target hold do not have to match.
When the display color of the reserved symbol and the display color of the target hold do not match in this way, it is conceivable that the display color after the change of the target hold has a higher degree of expectation than the display color of the reserved symbol. This is because if the display color after the change of the target hold becomes a low expectation, the player will be disappointed.
Further, if the display color of the reserved symbol and the display color of the target hold do not match in this way, the jackpot may be determined.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the hold symbol contains the character string "super hot", the target hold is changed to "red", but this is not limited to this. For example, it is conceivable to associate "super hot" with "golden", and it is also possible to associate "super hot" with two or more display colors. When associating with two or more display colors, you may select them randomly, or if there is a difference in the degree of expectation even with the same "super hot", "purple", "red", "gold" depending on the degree of expectation. May be selected. Of course, in addition to "super hot", character strings such as "moderate" and "chance" may be displayed. At this time, it is conceivable to associate "so-so" with "blue" and "chance" with "green".

[Modification 3]
In the above, during one fluctuation, the effects from the hold symbol stop effect to the hold change effect are performed. On the other hand, during one fluctuation, the effect from the hold symbol stop effect to the hold change effect may be performed twice or more. For example, after the reach formation effect is executed in FIG. 74 (H), the effects after the reserved symbol stop effect in FIG. 73 (B) may be executed.

[Modification example 4]
The above is an effect of stopping the reserved symbol HZ instead of the middle effect symbol 8C or the right effect symbol 8R, but the reserved symbol HZ may be stopped instead of the left effect symbol 8L.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine that displays a hold image in correspondence with hold memory, which is a memory of information about pending fluctuations.
Among the symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns, the symbols in a predetermined column are symbols that imitate the reserved image and stop at a reserved symbol that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game.
A movement display effect that moves the reserved symbol stopped by the symbol stop effect to the reserved image, and
When the reserved symbol moves to the reserved image in the moving display effect, the reserved mode changing effect changes the mode of the reserved image to a mode set according to the transition expectation degree suggested by the reserved symbol. Is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-1.
In the movement display effect, the stopped symbol is moved to the hold image after being enlarged.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-1.
In the movement display effect, the stopped symbol is moved to the hold image after being enlarged and then reduced and moved in a direction away from the hold image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-1.
In the moving display effect, the stopped symbol is enlarged and then reduced to move away from the reserved image, and then from the peripheral edge of the display screen to the reserved image so as to draw a curved trajectory. Can be moved,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4.
In the moving display effect, when the reserved symbol reaches the reserved image, an image showing a collision is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5.
The symbol stop effect is executed after the reach formation effect in which the variablely displayed symbol temporarily stops in a predetermined mode, and instead of the final stop symbol that stops after the reach formation effect to determine the winning, the reserved symbol is used. It is a production to stop,
A game machine characterized by that.

The symbol fluctuation stop effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. This symbol variation stop effect can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol variation stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Design fluctuation stop effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation stop effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move on the orbits K1, K2, and K3, respectively. The orbits K1, K2, and K3 are orbits that straddle the first region 7b at the upper part of the display screen 7a and the second region 7c at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The hold icon and the variable icon are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the left symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The left effect low-speed variation effect is an effect in which the variation speed of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down and the variation display is performed in a state where the left effect symbol 8L can be visually recognized. Here, "5", "6", and "7" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8L. At this time, the effect symbol 8L fluctuates on the orbit K1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol 8L is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed and one left effect symbol 8L is determined. The one left effect symbol 8L to be determined stops at the stop position 7d provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the right symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The low-speed fluctuation effect of the right effect symbol is an effect in which the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8L is slowed down and the variation display is performed in a state where the right effect symbol 8L can be visually recognized. Here, "5", "6", and "7" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8L. At this time, the effect symbol 8R fluctuates on the orbit K3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed and one right effect symbol 8R is determined. The one right effect symbol 8R to be determined stops at the stop position 7e provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the medium symbol low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The medium-design low-speed variation effect is an effect in which the variation speed of the medium-effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the variation is displayed in a state where the medium-effect symbol 8C can be visually recognized. Here, "5", "6", and "7" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8C. At this time, the effect symbol 8C fluctuates on the orbit K2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed, and one middle effect symbol 8C is determined. One determined medium effect symbol 8C stops at the stop position 7f provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning or losing of the winning game. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" symbols, indicating the winning mode. Further, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to straddle the first region 7b and the second region 7c.

[Design fluctuation stop effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation stop effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move on the orbits K1, K2, and K3, respectively. The orbits K1, K2, and K3 are orbits that straddle the first region 7b at the upper part of the display screen 7a and the second region 7c at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The hold icon and the variable icon are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of displaying an image in the first area 7b provided on the display screen 7a. Here, an image SG including a character image of "super hot" is displayed. This image SG is an image suggesting the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the left symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The left effect low-speed variation effect is an effect in which the variation speed of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down and the variation display is performed in a state where the left effect symbol 8L can be visually recognized. Here, "5" and "6" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8L. At this time, the effect symbol 8L fluctuates on the orbit included in the second region 7c of the orbit K1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol 8L is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed and one left effect symbol 8L is determined. The one left effect symbol 8L to be determined stops at the stop position 7d provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), the right symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The low-speed fluctuation effect of the right effect symbol is an effect in which the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8L is slowed down and the variation display is performed in a state where the right effect symbol 8L can be visually recognized. Here, "5" and "6" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8L. At this time, the effect symbol 8R fluctuates on the orbit included in the second region 7c of the orbit K3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed and one right effect symbol 8R is determined. The one right effect symbol 8R to be determined stops at the stop position 7e provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the medium symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The medium-design low-speed variation effect is an effect in which the variation speed of the medium-effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the variation is displayed in a state where the medium-effect symbol 8C can be visually recognized. Here, "5" and "6" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8C. At this time, the effect symbol 8C fluctuates on the orbit included in the second region 7c of the orbit K2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed, and one middle effect symbol 8C is determined. One determined medium effect symbol 8C stops at the stop position 7f provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.
In addition, following the middle symbol stop effect, the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 75 (H) may be executed.

[Design fluctuation stop effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation stop effect C.
Here, it is assumed that the image display device 6 is provided separately from the image display device 7, the display screen 6a of the image display device 6 is arranged, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is arranged below the display screen 6a. .. Further, the display screen 6a is provided with a first region 6b, and the display screen 7a is provided with a second region 7c.

First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move on the orbits K1, K2, and K3, respectively. The orbits K1, K2, and K3 are orbits that straddle the first region 6b of the display screen 6a and the second region 7c of the display screen 7a. The hold icon and the variable icon are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the left symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The left effect low-speed variation effect is an effect in which the variation speed of the left effect symbol 8L is slowed down and the variation display is performed in a state where the left effect symbol 8L can be visually recognized. Here, "5", "6", and "7" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8L. At this time, the effect symbol 8L fluctuates on the orbit K1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol 8L is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed and one left effect symbol 8L is determined. The one left effect symbol 8L to be determined stops at the stop position 7d provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of displaying an image in the first area 6b provided on the display screen 6a. Here, an image SG including a character image of "super hot" is displayed. This image SG is an image suggesting the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the right symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is executed. The low-speed fluctuation effect of the right effect symbol is an effect in which the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8L is slowed down and the variation display is performed in a state where the right effect symbol 8L can be visually recognized. Here, "5" and "6" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow YG as the effect symbol 8L. At this time, the effect symbol 8R fluctuates on the orbit included in the second region 7c of the orbit K3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed and one right effect symbol 8R is determined. The one right effect symbol 8R to be determined stops at the stop position 7e provided in the second region 7c. Here, it is shown that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. Here, if the ally character CRA wins, it will be a win. In the battle effect, the display straddling the display screen 6a and the display screen 7a is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning or losing of the winning game. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" symbols, indicating the winning mode. Further, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to straddle the first region 6b and the second region 7c.

It is conceivable to use the symbol variation display of the first aspect and the symbol variation display of the second aspect properly based on the degree of expectation of transition to the winning game.
In the present embodiment, as the degree of expectation of transition to the winning game increases, the symbol variation display of the second aspect is more likely to be selected instead of the symbol variation display of the first aspect.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the first aspect changes to the symbol variation display of the second aspect during the variation, it is conceivable to determine the timing of the change according to the degree of expectation of transition to the winning game. For example, as the degree of expectation of transition to the winning game increases, the timing of the change to the second aspect is accelerated within one variation. In this sense, the symbol variation stop effect B is more promising than the symbol variation stop effect C.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the symbol fluctuation stop effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a second region 7c different from the first region 7b (6b) and the first region 7b (6b) is provided on the display screen 7a (6a). Then, the symbol variation display of the first aspect (FIGS. 75 (A), (B), (D), (F)) in which the symbol is varied on the orbits K1, K2, and K3 straddling the first region 7b (6b) and the second region 7c. , FIGS. 76 (A) and 77 (A) (B)), and the image SG is displayed in the first region 7b (6b) so that the image SG is included in the second region 7c of the orbits K1, K2, and K3. It is possible to execute the second aspect of the symbol variation display (FIGS. 76 (C) (E) (G), FIG. 77 (E)) in which the symbol is changed only on the orbit. According to this configuration, since the symbol variation display is performed in a plurality of modes, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target of the symbol variation display of the first aspect or the symbol variation display of the second aspect is the symbol variation stop effect A and B, the left middle right effect symbol 8L, 8C and 8R, and in the symbol variation stop effect C, the left and right effect symbols are 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, the variation of the symbol variation display increases, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the symbol variation stop effect C, the first area 6a is provided on the display screen 6a of the image display device 6, and the second area 7c is an image display different from the image display device 6. It is provided on the display screen 7a of the device 7. According to this configuration, in the symbol variation display of the first aspect, the display straddles the display screens 6a and 7a, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stop positions 7d, 7e, and 7f are provided on the orbit included in the second region 7c in both the symbol variation display of the first aspect and the symbol variation display of the second aspect. (FIGS. 75 (C) (E) (G), FIG. 76 (D) (F) (H), FIG. 77 (C) (F)). According to this configuration, since the stop position is fixed in the second region 7c, the stop position can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the degree of expectation of transition to the winning game increases, the symbol variation display of the second aspect is more likely to be selected instead of the symbol variation display of the first aspect. According to this configuration, the expectation for hitting can be increased by changing the mode of the symbol variation display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image SC is an image suggesting the degree of expectation of the transition to the winning game. According to this configuration, the expectation for hitting is raised by the image displayed in the first region 7b (6b), and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the symbol fluctuation stop effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the orbits K1, K2, and K3 are straight lines, but they may fluctuate on curved orbits. Further, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed while changing their sizes. For example, it is conceivable that the display is the largest at the stop position and is displayed smaller as the distance from the stop position increases. On the contrary, it is conceivable that the display is the smallest at the stop position and is displayed larger as the distance from the stop position increases.

[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned winning notification effect (FIGS. 75 (H) and 77 (H)), all the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were displayed across the first region 7b (6b) and the second region 7c. However, it may be displayed so that some of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R straddle. At this time, some of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged.

[Modification 3]
In the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation stop effect C, the first region 6a is provided on the display screen 6a of the image display device 6, and the second region 7c is on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 different from the image display device 6. It is provided.
On the other hand, the sub display screen 64 may be used. For example, the sub display screens 64L and 64R may be provided with the first area, and the display screen 7a may be provided with the second area.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A9-1]
It ’s a game machine,
A first area and a second area different from the first area are provided on the display screen.
The symbol variation display of the first aspect in which the symbol is varied on a predetermined orbit straddling the first region and the second region, and
By displaying the specific image in the first region, it is possible to execute the symbol variation display of the second aspect in which the symbol is varied only on the orbit included in the second region of the predetermined orbit.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-1.
The symbol variation display of the first aspect and the symbol variation display of the second aspect are executed for the symbols in a predetermined row among the symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A9-1 or the aspect A9-2.
The first area is provided on a display screen of a first display device, and the second area is provided on a display screen of a second display device different from the first display device.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-3.
In both the symbol variation display of the first aspect and the symbol variation display of the second aspect, a stop position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is provided on the orbit included in the second region.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-4.
When the degree of expectation of the transition to the winning game is high, the symbol variation display of the second aspect is likely to be executed instead of the symbol variation display of the first aspect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-5.
The specific image is an image suggesting the degree of expectation of the transition to the winning game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a rotating body type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63, a sword member 65, and a select button 68 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the operation unit is not limited to these, and a lever or an operation unit to be operated by the player is not limited to these. , Triggers and the like may be used. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 65. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment uses a display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the game machine 1 includes a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64. The display effect performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect can be modified or improved without departing from its purpose and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening opening opening 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
64 ... Sub-display screen 69 ... Frame movable accessory 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a gaming state switching means for switching the gaming state to the second gaming state when the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches a specific number of times.
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the gaming machine is turned on reaches the first predetermined number, the arrival schedule information which is the information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached is displayed. The first production to be performed can be performed,
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations after the power of the gaming machine is turned on becomes the second predetermined number of times equal to or less than the first predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the specific number is greater than the threshold value. When the number is small, a second effect in which suggestive information suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations is less than the threshold value is displayed can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 2.
In the second effect, when the suggestion information is displayed, the arrival schedule information is also displayed, and when the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine reaches the first predetermined number of times. The arrival schedule information is continuously displayed until
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 3.
When the suggestion information is displayed in the second effect, after the second effect, the number of fluctuations after the power of the game machine is turned on becomes the third predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times. Occasionally, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the display of the suggestion information disappears while the display of the arrival schedule information is continued.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means.
The display of the suggestion information means that the suggestion image appears.
In the second effect, the suggestion image is displayed on the first display means, then moved to the second display means, and the suggestion image is displayed on the second display means by the movement. The arrival schedule information is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5.
In the second effect, when the number of fluctuations after the game machine is turned on reaches the second predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached is smaller than the threshold value. However, the suggestion information may not be displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.